JP2020022891A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which allows a display control system to be easily structured in spite of a plurality of display devices and can suppress an increase in costs related to hardware and software.SOLUTION: The game machine has: a sub control board which can output a display signal to a plurality of display devices such as a projector and a sub liquid crystal display device; and a scaler board SK provided between the plurality of display devices and the sub control board. A sub CPU of the sub control board combines display signals respectively corresponding to the plurality of display devices, outputs one combination signal and gives an instruction to set as display information the number of displays and display characteristics corresponding to each of the plurality of display devices. A multiple output scaler LSI 710 of the scaler board SK sets the number of displays and display characteristics instructed by the sub control board, inputs the one combination signal output by the sub control board, divides the one combination signal into a plurality of display signals and outputs the display signals divided to the corresponding plurality of display devices respectively.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 43

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine and a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some conventional gaming machines include a scalar board that converts the resolution of a display device that displays video for a game or the like (see Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, a display signal whose resolution has been changed is supplied to a display device through a scaler substrate, and an image is displayed on a screen of the display device based on the display signal.

JP 2008-23384 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine as described above has a disadvantage that the cost tends to increase in terms of hardware and software.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in hardware and software costs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine of the present invention
A plurality of display devices (for example, projector device B2, sub liquid crystal display device DD19),
A display control unit (for example, a sub-control board SS, a scaler board SK) that can output a display signal to the plurality of display devices,
The display control unit,
A display signal synthesizing unit (for example, a sub-control board SS) that synthesizes image data corresponding to the plurality of display devices to generate a display signal;
A display signal dividing means (for example, a scaler substrate SK) for dividing the display signal into a plurality and generating a divided display signal;
Display signal output means (for example, a scaler board SK) capable of outputting the divided display signal to the plurality of display devices,
The display signal dividing means is capable of dividing the display signal into a plurality of divided display signals and converting the display signal into a resolution corresponding to the divided display signal, and converting the display signal into a resolution corresponding to the plurality of display devices. And can be output.
Further, the display signal dividing means can generate divided display signals of two kinds of resolutions,
Among the two types of resolutions, the first resolution and the second resolution are resolutions in which a vertical axis and a horizontal axis of the first resolution are different from a vertical axis and a horizontal axis of the second resolution. , Wherein the first resolution is higher than the second resolution.
Further, the display signal output means can change an enlargement ratio by setting when converting the divided display signal.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A plurality of display devices (for example, a projector device B2, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19, etc.),
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) capable of outputting a display signal to the plurality of display devices;
Display signal conversion means (for example, a scaler board SK or the like) provided one-to-one with the control means between the plurality of display devices and the control means,
The control means includes:
A display signal synthesizing unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 that generates a divided display pattern) that synthesizes display signals corresponding to each of the plurality of display devices;
Combined signal output means for outputting one combined signal combined by the display signal combining means (for example, the sub CPU 400 for generating a divided display pattern);
Display information setting instructing means (for example, a sub CPU 400 for performing a scalar control process) for instructing setting of the number of displays and display characteristics according to each of the plurality of display devices as display information;
The display signal conversion means,
A display information setting unit (for example, an MCU 700 for performing a scalar substrate main process) for setting a display number and a display characteristic instructed by the display information setting instructing unit;
Combined signal input means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler board SK) for inputting one combined signal output from the combined signal output means;
Composite signal dividing means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler substrate SK) for dividing one composite signal input by the composite signal input means into a plurality of display signals;
A display signal output unit (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler substrate SK) capable of outputting a plurality of same or different display signals divided by the synthesized signal division unit to the corresponding plurality of display devices, respectively; And having
The control means is capable of rewriting the display information according to a setting change,
When dividing the one synthesized signal into the number of synthesized images, the synthesized signal dividing unit divides the synthesized signal into a plurality of display signals having a resolution corresponding to the display information. It is characterized by doing.

  According to such a configuration, although there are a plurality of display devices, a plurality of display signals corresponding to the plurality of display devices are output from the control unit as one combined signal, and the number of display and the display characteristics set and instructed by the control unit are reduced. The one composite signal is divided into a plurality of original display signals based on the display signals, and these display signals are supplied to the corresponding display devices. Therefore, a display control system can be easily constructed, and hardware and It is possible to suppress an increase in software cost.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The display signal conversion unit may include, as the display number and the display characteristic, a combination number of one composite signal input by the composite signal input unit and a resolution of the plurality of display signals divided by the composite signal division unit. The setting is instructed by the display information setting instructing means.

  According to such a configuration, the display characteristic can be set and instructed for each of the number of composite signals of one composite signal and a plurality of display signals divided according to the number of composite signals. Can be efficiently converted into a plurality of different display signals.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in hardware and software costs.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a rear surface perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are open. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. FIG. 3 is an upper perspective view of the projector device. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. FIG. 2 is a lower perspective view of the projector device. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a rear perspective view of a display unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of the projector device. FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view of the projector device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a lens unit of the projector device. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a figure for explaining a positioning method of an upper pedestal. It is a figure for explaining a posture adjustment method of a lower pedestal. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a connection form between a projector device and an adjustment PC. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating a case of the projector device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating a state where a heat sink and an optical element are arranged in a case of the projector device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an air flow path formed in a case of the projector device. It is a front view showing the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism were opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram showing the system configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a main control board. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a sub control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a reel drive board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub-relay board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a scaler substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a multi-output scaler LSI. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the divided display pattern of a projector apparatus and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a divided display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a divided display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of a divided display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of a divided display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of a divided display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of a divided display pattern. It is an explanatory view for explaining the communication specification of a game machine. It is a figure showing a command exchanged between a scaler board and a sub control board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating commands exchanged between a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate and a sub control substrate. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating commands exchanged between a projector control board and a sub control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating error information transmitted as a command from each board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of adjustment PC. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process when the power of the main control board is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process when the power of the sub-control board is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen property control task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the focus change request process of a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device reception interruption process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device initialization processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of scaler control reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler starting parameter request reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler status command reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler reception confirmation reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub liquid crystal control reception of a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal setting change process of a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating processing when a sub-control board receives a sub liquid crystal status command. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception of a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a projector control process for a sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process at the time of projector control reception of the sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process at the time of receiving a projector start-up parameter request of the sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a projector setting change process of a sub control board. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a process of receiving a projector reception confirmation on the sub control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process when a sub-control board receives a projector error notification. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process performed when a sub-control board receives a projector status. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a projector drift correction process of a sub control board. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a memory map 1 of a scaler substrate. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a memory map 2 of the scaler substrate. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing of a scaler substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st serial line reception interruption process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device bypass transmission process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub-control-scaler reception of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of transmission between sub-control of a scaler board and a scaler. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control bypass transmission process of a scaler board. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating a memory map of a projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a projector control main process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a serial line reception interrupt process of the projector control board. 5 is a flowchart illustrating initialization processing of a projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a sub control-projector reception process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an internal setting change process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a projector setting value storage process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-control-projector transmission process of the projector control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a status transmission data creation process of the projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-liquid crystal control main process of a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interruption process of a sub liquid crystal I / F board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating initialization processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. 9 is a flowchart showing a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate sub-control-sub-liquid crystal inter-reception reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F board. 9 is a flowchart showing a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an adjustment screen when performing optical adjustment of the projector device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an adjustment screen when performing optical adjustment of the projector device. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing a first modification of the projector device. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a second modification of the projector device. FIG. 15 is a front view showing an arrangement of a projector device according to a third modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played using a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, a token, or the like, or a card or the like that stores information of a game value given to or given to a player. In the following, description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right and left sides of the gaming machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, a direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at an upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower cabinet arranged at a lower front part of the cabinet G. And a door mechanism DD.

  Further, two openings G41 penetrating in the up-down direction are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

  The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the upper part. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is mounted on the back surface of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU mainly includes three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on each outer peripheral surface. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in a side-by-side state (horizontal one row) so that they can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. On the reels RL, RC, RR, the operations of the reels RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, DD2c that are substantially horizontal are formed. A medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals is provided in the first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an active line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals.

  A sub display device DD20 is provided in the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The sub-display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of paid-out medals and the remaining number of credited medals when a winning is established. Since the maximum number of medals to be credited to the gaming machine 1 is usually 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device DD20. When the maximum number of medals of 50 has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout exit DD14 as they are.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for rotating the reels RL, RC, RR by operation of the player and for starting the variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the sub-display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by a player's pressing operation (stop operation), respectively. , DD7C, DD7R.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is for switching the credit / payout of medals obtained by the player by a push button operation. In a state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are discharged from a medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided in a coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving section DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a cosmetic panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, names representing the model of the gaming machine 1, various patterns, and the like are drawn by printing.

  Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout exit DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voices and music. A sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is arranged on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch type position input device is arranged on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects a contact of a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a type that detects contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure). In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T can be used to perform optical adjustment of a projector device B2 described later.

  The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays, on its display screen, game information such as, for example, the number of games as the game progresses, A message or input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

  In addition, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, it is also possible to display, on the display screen, contents (production information) corresponding to the production relating to the game, for example, as the game progresses. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing effect, or a jog dial or a push button as a dedicated attachment may be provided. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can be omitted by distributing its functions to a display unit A or the like described later. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be arranged on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side, and a display surface is provided with a translucently decorated panel so that effects can be performed. May be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and, for example, positions the position (projection distance and angle Etc.) and an image generated based on the shape and corresponding to the effect information is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful effect.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C (see FIGS. 12 and 13). Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right plate C2, a left plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is exchangeably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is disposed in front of the projector device B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector device B2 obliquely below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorly provided by the case B22, and is disposed at a rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The case B22 has an entire top surface open. Thus, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 forwards, through a lens or the like, irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD 241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33). Are arranged so as to be emitted toward the mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector device B2 (in the emission direction of the irradiation light). The mirror mechanism B3 holds an optical mirror B32 by a mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. In addition, the mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding part B11 so that the interval thereof can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in a projector cover B1. In addition, the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front at the front. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 has an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and a left-right symmetric arrangement in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. Side walls B13, B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of a front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward. I have.

  Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is located so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a protruding from the side walls B13, B13 is set to a distance slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G, the second protrusion B131b is located so as to correspond to a space behind the opening of the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side walls B13, B13 is set to a distance slightly shorter than the width of the space of the cabinet G. That is, the side walls B13, B13 are formed so that the distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the second protrusions B131b is greater than the distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the first protrusions B131a. . Thereby, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

  In addition, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the up-down direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are screwed into each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 via the screw holes B131C. Further, since the protruding portions B131 protrude from the lower ends of the side walls B13, B13 in the horizontal direction, the protruding portions B131 and the side walls B13 are provided on both side ends of the projector cover B1, and the recess B132 is formed from the front end thereof. Are formed continuously toward the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. The shape of the upper wall B12 and the side wall B13 of the projector cover B1 is such that the distance between the lower end of each side wall B13 and the tip of the second protrusion B131b protruding from the lower end is the second protrusion. The front part of B131b is configured to be larger than the rear part (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the space in front of the space BS overlap when viewed from above. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facilities.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, the lower surface side of the projector cover B1, perforated plate B15 is provided having a plurality of holes B151. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, or the like). The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly dispersed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed to bend obliquely downward and backward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower part B15c is formed so as to bend in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13, B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. Further, the inclined portion B15b is disposed so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 when viewed from above. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed.

  The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side in a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image by irradiation light and a front exposure position arranged on the lower side in an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

  In addition, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation unit B from being viewed even if the irradiation unit B is present on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation unit B from this line of sight.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, a screw is screwed into the upper surface of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via the screw hole B131C formed in the projecting portion B131 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and integrally handle them.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, as the plurality of screen mechanisms, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided. The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are relatively displaced with respect to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, and are respectively a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2. (See FIG. 20). The front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier than the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has the box-shaped screen casing C10 as described above. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen casing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation unit B is located are open. Box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

  Each of the bottom plate C1, the right plate C2, the left plate C3, and the back plate C4 is separately molded into a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Accordingly, even when the entire screen unit C cannot be shared, the unit can be shared by the plate members of the bottom plate C1, the right plate C2, the left plate C3, and the back plate C4. In addition, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placement part C11 arranged at the center, and a right placement part C12 and a left placement part C13 arranged in the left-right direction with the center placement part C11 as a center. . These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positionable by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end of the left movable body base C6. The right and left movable bases C5 and C6 each have a three-dimensional pattern formed on the inner side in the left-right direction by unevenness. That is, the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable base C5, and the left movable base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward, so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front part C14. When the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, the front portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 so that the front unit C14 moves backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G via the through hole C141 of the front part C14. It has become.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by catching a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches into the cabinet G, holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes out the display unit A out of the cabinet G. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the detached display unit A, and rotates the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C21. The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 is opened. By operating the crank gear E21 from above, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A out of the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20) is positioned by the motor housing portion C22. Further, a first support portion C23 for rotatably supporting a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 in the front screen driving mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen driving mechanism E2 are respectively provided on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. A second support portion C24 for rotatably supporting a shaft member E3 serving as the gear shaft of the second embodiment is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen driving mechanism E2B of the front screen driving mechanism E2 and the reel screen driving mechanism F2 are disposed between the right movable base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and positioning the relay board CK is formed in a lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK includes various functional components (for example, the projector device B2, the front screen driving mechanism E2, the reel screen driving mechanism F2, and the like) of the display unit A, and various functional components other than the display unit A (such as a sub-control board SS described later). ) Is a relay board for relaying a wiring (not shown) with (a). The relay board CK includes a screen drive control board CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) for exchanging signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed forward of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thus, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is formed by the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and the right plate C2, the left plate C3, and the back plate C4 of the screen device C. Will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thereby, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed in the intermediate support plate G1 at a position facing the space GS (see FIG. 5). The through-hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which wiring from a device (such as a sub-control board SS to be described later) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. . Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is achieved by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space into the through-hole G11. This can be performed by connecting to CK1.

  Since the relay board CK is arranged outside the screen device C in this way, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside through the ventilation holes G3a (see FIG. 2) formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, the wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear part of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it is easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased.

  In addition, since the relay board CK is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet G, light hardly reaches the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes below the intermediate support plate G1 through the through hole G11. It may be constituted so that it may project. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen drive mechanisms F2, E2, and the relay board CK are respectively positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2, C3, and the back plate C4, and They are positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even when the entire display unit A cannot be shared among the models of the gaming machines 1, the common display unit A can be shared among the models on a board basis. As a result, it is possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case where the display unit is manufactured for each model.

  Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the connection between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled such that the respective plates C1 to C4 are exchangeable. This makes it possible to replace the functional components of the display unit on a board-by-board basis, thereby making it possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing functional components that are not to be replaced by the display unit A. .

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable base C5 is disposed on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is disposed on the right inside of the left front screen driving mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are the decorative members, make it difficult for the player to see these drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a concave portion for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 hides the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, so that an image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed, so that an image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflecting surfaces of the reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface having a continuously changing angle with respect to the optical axis and having a center of curvature located on the front side may be provided.

  The front reflection part D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set as follows. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Accordingly, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while making an image by the irradiation light appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the white blur due to the mixing of light due to the irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately used, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the step E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen driving mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right screen connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen driving mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is configured to be inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end when arranged at the front standby position (in a standby posture). ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector B2.

  As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end toward the front end, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. As compared with the case of the posture, the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation unit B can be suppressed from being hindered by the front screen mechanism E1. Thus, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when located at the front standby position can be made closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, even in the limited space of the display unit A, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when disposed at the front standby position is set with respect to the projector device B2. Can be approached. As a result, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. A position where the upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is located on the rear surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1 when the front end is located at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). It is connected to.

  At an intermediate position, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by a right movable base C5 (see FIG. 13). This allows the crank member E22 to rotate at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position as the center of rotation. Note that this intermediate position coincides with the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1.

  As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 has its upper end (one end) connected to a position on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 to be an upper position when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). . With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased.

  A slide groove (not shown) is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed to have a U-shape in side view. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. When the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, the line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position is the center point between the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26. Are set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so that the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. When the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. Since it is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22. Thus, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the crank gear E21 starts to rotate easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, and thus the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21. A two-joint link having one degree of freedom is formed in which E21a and E21a are fixed ends and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along a slide groove. When the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove, so that the crank member E22 rotates around the intermediate position as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor, and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK, and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 gradually accelerates from 0 in a stopped state in a standby posture or an exposure posture, reaches a maximum speed in an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture, and then gradually decelerates. When the exposure posture or the standby posture is reached, the stop state becomes 0 again. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23, E23 and the shaft member E3 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B respectively rotate integrally. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23, E23, the crank gears E21, E21 are rotated, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis, and the front standby position is shifted to the front standby position. It will move between the exposure positions.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B with the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, compared to a case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B disposed to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as a rotation axis of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the shaft member E3 is increased, and it is possible to arrange the shaft member E3 so as not to hinder the arrangement of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the additional object while maintaining the rotation range and the size of the front screen mechanism E1 at desired levels.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D, light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. In addition, since the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is located forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, it is compared with the case where the rotation center axis is located rearward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis (the length of the crank member E22) can be reduced. For this reason, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired size.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is formed of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in a side view that is curved into a shape approximating the rotating direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex toward the upstream side in the light irradiation direction from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. In addition, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, which is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between a reel standby position and a reel exposure position by a driving force of a reel screen driving mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a is capable of displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the right end rear surface and the left end rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. A support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) is formed on the outer surface of the other end of each of the two arm members F21 so as to project outward in the left-right direction. These support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, respectively. Thus, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shaft F21a as a rotation center. Note that these support shafts F21a coincide with the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arc-shaped gear F22 is fixed to a distal end of a support shaft F21a disposed on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 meshes with the arc gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK, and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub-control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear F23, the arc gear F22 rotates. Then, in association with the rotation of the arc gear F22, the arm member F21 is rotated, whereby the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position are switched. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different driving mechanisms E2 and F2, respectively. That is, the driving of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control board SS (see FIG. 34) determines the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the front standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position. ing. Similarly, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is determined based on the reel standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from the origin position.

  However, when the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not performed normally or when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is turned off, the sub control board SS Cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub-control board SS performs a return operation of returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin positions (standby positions) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

  For example, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are each disposed in an overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed in the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen is at the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel exposure position.

(Screen surface processing)
Next, the surface processing of the screen will be described. A screen to be projected, such as the front reflection part D1, right reflection part D2, left reflection part D3, and bottom reflection part D4 of the fixed screen mechanism D, the projection plane E11a of the front screen member E11, and the projection plane F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. Is subjected to a graining process to achieve an appropriate performance. The graining process is a process in which a grain (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface. The screen or the like to be projected is molded using a mold that has been subjected to grain processing, whereby a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the screen or the like to be projected. With such a wrinkle pattern on the surface, reflection of the light source can be effectively prevented, and furthermore, excellent reflection of the projected image can be realized.

  The graining includes a pattern called “pear-skin”. In the present embodiment, for example, a pear-skin pattern having a mean depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft of 3% or more (pear-skin No. 5) Is preferred.

  In addition, as a surface treatment of a screen or the like, a two-layer coating is applied to realize an appropriate performance. The two-layer coating means that paints having different characteristics are respectively applied on top and bottom (two layers). For example, a high-brightness paint having high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver which is “ultra-high-brightness silver” of a metallic paint) is used for the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, “matte” is used for the overcoat). HG-650 white). Also, about 5% of a matting agent (silica) can be added to HG-650 white.

  In such a coating, the thickness of the overcoat is, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the thickness of the undercoat is, for example, about 1 μm. With such a coating, the gloss at a gloss of 60 ° is 4 to 5.

  In addition, 2P-600 silver uses vapor-deposited aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating film is set to 20 to 30%, which is higher than that of general silver paint, so that higher gloss is obtained. Values (reflection performance). The composition of HG-650 white is such that the resin is 20 to 30%, the titanium oxide is 30 to 40%, the matting agent silica is 5 to 10%, the additive is 0.5 to 2%, and the solvent is 30 to 40%.

  In addition, as a top coating, HG-650 white is used as a matting agent with glass- or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters added in a predetermined ratio, or with silica in addition to the beads. It can also be used. In addition, HG-650F clear or a paint obtained by adding beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent to a HG-650F clear by a predetermined ratio can be used. The film thickness can be variously adjusted, for example, to 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear is such that the resin is 20 to 30%, the matting agent silica is 2 to 5%, the additive is 0.5 to 2%, and the solvent is 60 to 70%.

  As another undercoat paint, HG-650 white or a paint obtained by adding glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent to HG-650 white at a predetermined ratio can be used. Also, the film thickness can be variously adjusted, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

  As described above, by forming a screen or the like to be projected by graining or by applying a two-layer coating, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and to further improve the reflection of the projected image. Can be realized. In addition, the above-described two-layer coating may be applied to the screen or the accessory which has been subjected to the graining. The material such as a screen to be projected is, for example, a black or white ABS resin or a transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS to be described later is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay board CK and the sub-control board SS are connected via a scaler board SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 in accordance with the production operation of the screen and the accessory, and projects the irradiation light on the screen and the accessory via the optical mechanism B24, as a visual effect. Display video. Further, in the assembling process of the display unit A and the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to perform initial focus setting (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as an adjustment device of the projector device B2. However, as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone on which an adjustment program (application software) is installed is used. Or a dedicated terminal device.

  The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 includes LED light sources 240R, 240G that emit light of each color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) as components disposed around the lens unit B21. 240B, DMD 241, and a focus mechanism 242 for performing focus adjustment on the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21.

  The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on a command from the sub-control board SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control board SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores data relating to the setting and adjustment of the projector B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not shown, the control LSI 230 includes a ROM in which a control program and the like are stored, and a DRAM used for a work area related to setting and adjustment of the projector B2.

  The DLP system of the projector B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and DMD 241 of the optical mechanism B24.

  The DMD 241 is obtained by integrating a mirror corresponding to a pixel corresponding to a display resolution on a main surface of a semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is tilted by + 10 ° or −10 ° around an axis along a diagonal line with respect to the main surface due to an electrostatic field effect of a memory element immediately below each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state in which light is reflected in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state in which light is reflected outside a predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in the ON state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via a dichroic mirror or the like (not shown) is guided again to the lens unit B21 via the dichroic mirror or the like, while being OFF. In the state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B via a dichroic mirror or the like is reflected toward a direction other than the lens unit B21.

  The DLP control circuit 232 controls an LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, and receives light of each color of RGB from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B in a time-division manner via a dichroic mirror (not shown) or the like. Incident on At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 determines at which timing the mirror corresponding to which pixel is to be turned on or off in accordance with the image to be projected, that is, which color light out of RGB light is transmitted at which timing. It is determined whether the light is reflected in a predetermined direction, and the ON / OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241 is controlled.

  Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in a predetermined direction by the DMD 241 proceeds to the lens unit B21, enters the mirror mechanism B3 by passing through the projection lens 210, and finally enters the mirror mechanism B3. By being reflected, it is guided to the projection target. Thereby, the irradiation light is projected on the screen or the accessory as a projection target, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. In addition, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by turning back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. Accordingly, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in a limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as constituent elements serving as an exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to a front opening B22k of the case B22. An under cover B223 is disposed on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via a stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end thereof so as to cover the upper opening of the case B22. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for mounting and adjusting the projector device B2 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 23, 24, and 33, the projector device B2 includes, as internal components, a lens unit B21, LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and a DMD 241 on which LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are mounted. DMD board 241a, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), and projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is accommodated while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered by the lens unit cover B222, and the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, the DMD board 241a, and the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) made of, for example, a thermistor is mounted on the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a. These temperature sensors B25 detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and near the lens unit B21, and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

  The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a for accommodating a dichroic mirror and a reflector (not shown), a lens group 210A including the projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b provided at a front portion of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and There is a focus mechanism 242 provided on the front right side of the optical case B21a so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-back direction). The optical case B21a is provided with an opening that allows the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 to face from outside to inside. The rear part of the lens holder B21b is fixed to the front part of the optical case B21a, while the front part is relatively moved in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242 with respect to the rear part. Holds a projection lens 210. Note that the lens unit B21 is provided with a so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown), and by using this lens shift mechanism, it is possible to finely adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image. is there.

  The focus mechanism 242 focuses on the reflection surfaces of the reflection units D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a displaced with respect to the projector device B2 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210. The focus mechanism 242 is arranged along the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 and a rack member 242A that can move integrally with the front part of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed with the rack member 242A. A lead screw 242B that can rotate while rotating, and a focus motor 242C that rotates the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

  For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves forward by a feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 moves forward together with the rack member 242A. By making the focal length relatively long, the focus (focus position) can be adjusted to a distant place. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves rearward by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 is integrated with the rack member 242A and the front lens 242A also moves forward. As a result, the focal length is relatively shortened, so that a closer focus (focus position) is achieved.

  According to such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in conjunction with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. Also, for example, when the projection target is changed from the projection plane E11a to the projection plane F1a, or vice versa, the optical path length from the projection lens 210 to each projection target differs to some extent. The focal point (focus position) can be statically changed so as to have an appropriate focal length according to the length.

  The front portion of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with a lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a light transmitting surface B222a through which light emitted from the projection lens 210 is transmitted. Light emitted from the projection lens 210 is transmitted through the light transmitting surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. .

  The LED board 240Ra is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear right side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240R faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED board 240Ga is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear deep side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED board 240Ba is disposed in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear left side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The DMD board 241a is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and the DMD 241 faces the inside of the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and DMD 241, the LED light sources 240G and 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD 241 are relatively high. It shows a low trend.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, a focus mechanism 242 is disposed on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and a projection lens 210 is disposed in front of the lens holder B21b. The front part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although not described in detail, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be able to move the front part of the lens holder B21b in the optical axis direction.

  That is, the projection lens 210 can be moved by the focus mechanism 242 integrally with the front part of the lens holder B21b, and as shown in FIG. 24A, from the rear side to the front side along the optical axis direction. Or, it moves from the front side to the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B reaches the DMD 241 via a collimator, a dichroic mirror and the like (not shown), is reflected by the DMD 241, and is then reflected by the dichroic mirror and the like. And finally exits through the projection lens 210.

  As described above, the projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction. As a result, focus adjustment is performed, and a focused and clear image is projected on the screen or the accessory whose position has been changed by the movement.

  The projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control board SS such that image data relating to an image such as a performance is transmitted from the sub-control board SS, and the image is projected on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control board SS controls the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect contents.

  Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 in accordance with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 by the effect, and the projection planes E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection plane of the fixed screen mechanism D. The focus is adjusted so that the image is clearly projected.

  The heat sink 243R is disposed on the right side in the case B22, and partially contacts the rear surface of the LED board 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is arranged on the rear side in the case B22, and partially contacts the rear surface of the LED board 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is arranged at the center in the case B22, and partially contacts the rear surface of the LED board 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is arranged on the left side inside the case B22, and partially contacts the back surface of the DMD board 241a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a into the air, so that the temperature of the optical element or the board is changed until the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Heat is dissipated efficiently so as not to rise. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat dissipating effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipating fins for increasing the contact area with air.

  The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the left part of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the rear surface of the rear part of the case B22, and close to the heat sink 243G.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, an intake port B22A is provided at a right front portion of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244A is close, and a heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided at a right rear portion of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided at a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and another part of the left side of the case B22 is aligned with the intake port B22B. The air inlet B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space S. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 where the exhaust fan 245 approaches.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly sucked by the suction fan 244A from the suction port B22A, the air is exhausted from the discharge port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as a flow of air. Further, in the case B22, after the air is forcibly sucked from the air inlet B22B by the air suction fan 244B, the heat is removed from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G while the air is exhausted from the air outlet B22D by the exhaust fan 45. An air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted to the air. Further, in the case B22, after the air is sucked in through the air inlet B22C, the air flow path is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust outlet B22D while mainly removing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. P3 is formed.

  The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered by the under cover B223. On the projector control board B23, a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: position / posture adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and includes a rectangular main body portion 2200 and a main body portion 2200. Left and right ends 2201a and 2201b, which are formed by bending the left and right sides downward and outward and have a step with the main body 2200 and extend to the left and right sides, and partially from the rear to the rear of the main body 2200. And a rear end portion 2202 extending to the rear end. The body 2200 and the rear end 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall B12 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) inserted and fastened thereto.

  The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member generally corresponding to the main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower pedestal B221 so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A. These three connection screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 into the connection hole 2200A while externally fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connection screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By connecting the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212 while being in the slidable state, the upper pedestal B220 is suspended and connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connection portions R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance between them can be adjusted. Each of the connection portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connection hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

  By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector apparatus B2 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 so as to be capable of performing positioning adjustment and optical axis adjustment.

  FIG. 28 shows an attachment form of the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower view of FIG. 28 (a) is a view showing a state where the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper view of FIG. 28 (a) is a view of FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB 'line | wire shown in a lower figure. FIG. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), a mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is disposed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall B12 and the lower surface of the left end 2201a. Thus, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 with the same screws.

  Here, a hatched portion indicated by a symbol A in FIG. 28A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1.

  FIG. 28B shows a state in which the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. The upper diagram of FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view along the line D-D ′ shown in the lower diagram of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 28B, the screw axis of the mounting screw T is relatively deflected to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range of the hatched portion indicated by the reference symbol C (adjustment range). Can be moved.

  As described above, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. Accordingly, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction as the reference direction.

  FIG. 29 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connection hole 2200A, the connection screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connection portion R2. Although FIG. 29 shows one connecting portion R2, the other connecting portions R1 and R3 are also the same.

  The connection screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connection hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via a washer 2212 disposed on the upper surface side of the main body 2200. You. A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connection screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the periphery of the connection hole 2200A. Since the coil spring 2211 urges portions near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in directions away from each other (vertical direction), the screw between the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 is screwed. Prevention of looseness at the joint portion is achieved.

  In such a connection portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in a tightening direction or a loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is reduced. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to an upper wall B12 not shown in FIG. Therefore, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction approaching the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

  In the other connecting portions R1 and R3 as well, the height of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of tightening of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangular shape so that the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are not located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 or the lower pedestal B221. Are arranged as follows. That is, since the lower pedestal B221 can finely adjust the height position by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is changed in the front-rear direction, It is possible to adjust the degree of tilt in the three-dimensional space in both the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

  Such a posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating a screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At this time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected on a surface such as a screen in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 so that a so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur in the image display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device B2 via the sub-control board SS and the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 performs adjustment of the optical axis direction and checks the display image on a screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory or the like. Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying an image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, optical parameters relating to the projection position of irradiation light, focus adjustment, and the like in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and the optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this manner are stored in the horizontal and vertical directions and the focus position adjustment value data (horizontal position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E adjustment value, focus position A ＥE adjustment value) is stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). The adjustment value data of the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the focus position stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory, and the gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade. But it can be used as it is. Such horizontal position adjustment and vertical adjustment data are obtained to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B21, and the focus position adjustment value data is obtained to control the focus mechanism 242. . The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the focus position A to E adjustment value, and the horizontal position A to E offset, the vertical position A to E offset, and the focus position to be described later. As for “A to E” of the A to E offset and focus drift correction values A to E, for example, “A” is the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D, “B” is the projection surface E11a, “C” of the front screen member E11. Corresponds to the adjustment value data corresponding to the projection plane F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and “D” and “E” are spares in consideration of future expandability (when the number of projection planes is increased). .

  As is clear from the above description with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B <b> 2 is positioned mainly in the left-right direction and the front-back direction according to the mounting position on the upper wall B <b> 12 of the upper pedestal B <b> 220. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space.

  In this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three places. However, if at least three places satisfy the condition that they are not on the same straight line, four places are provided. The connecting portion may be provided as described above. In the present embodiment, the connection holes 2200A are provided in the upper pedestal B220 and the connection screw portions 2210 are provided in the lower pedestal B221. However, these connection holes and the connection screw portions may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, but may be any as long as it can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connection screw portion may be a bolt fixed through the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Air intake and exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector device B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, and B22C, and is provided with two exhaust ports B22D and B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C, two intake ports B22A, B22B are provided with intake fans 244A, 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Further, of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E, one exhaust port B22D is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

  At the intake port B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244A, and the flow of the air passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1, thereby removing heat from the heat sink 243R. Thereafter, the air flow path P1 flows linearly from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (exhausted) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

  Also at the intake port B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244B. This air flow passes through a plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as an air flow path P2, thereby removing heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G. Thereafter, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245, flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged (discharged heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

  At the intake port B22C, air is semi-forcibly taken into the case B22 mainly by the retraction force of the exhaust fan 245. The flow of the air mainly passes through the heat sinks 243B and 243G while passing through a substantial part of the empty space S as the air flow path P3, thereby removing heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G. Thereafter, the air flow path P3 is also drawn into the exhaust fan 245 so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22 while merging with the air flow path P2. (Exhausted heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector device B2.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B exhibit relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD 241 exhibit relatively low heat generation characteristics. The LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which the LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with the heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

  Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 join at a single exhaust port B22D while flowing from separate intake ports B22B and B22C, and flow out of the exhaust port B22D using the exhaust port B22D as a common vent. It has become. Thereby, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are forcibly discharged while being merged into a smooth flow, so that the plurality of heat sinks 243G and 243B can be efficiently taken out of heat and cooled. .

  Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are efficiently and forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245, the heat pool caused by the plurality of optical elements such as the LED light sources 240G and 240B and the DMD 241 in the projector device B2 is effectively prevented. And overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

  Further, since three more heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G are cooled by the two air flow paths P2, P3 communicating with one exhaust port B22D, they are provided corresponding to these heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G. A plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, the two air flow paths P2 and P3 merge at one exhaust port 245. However, for example, three or more air flow paths P1 are also merged at the exhaust port 245. May be collectively discharged from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in an upper space of the cabinet G. A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and a sub-control board SS Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub-control board SS. A sheet metal BK is provided between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub-control board SS. Further, a sub relay board SN is provided between the sub control board SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the hopper mechanism HP, there is provided a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for replenishing metal medals from outside, and medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Above the medal supply mechanism MH, a scaler substrate SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control substrate SS is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub-control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub-control board SS. The thin sub-relay board SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin sub-control board SS detachably attached to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. They are arranged in a state where the L-shape is upside down.

  According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out toward the sub-control board SS, the sheet metal BK is used. The medal can be prevented from physically contacting the sub-control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented by the sheet metal BK. Further, the sub-control board SS is provided at the back of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the rear wall G3 and the sheet metal BK. Therefore, the sub-control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. Can not do. This enhances the security of the sub-control board SS.

(Lower door mechanism DD: lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door lock mechanism G51 includes a locked part G511 fixed to the right end of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking part G512 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G, And a cylinder lock G513.

  The locked portion G511 includes two bar-shaped locked bars G511a and G511b formed on both ends of a concave frame G511c at upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G512 includes a long tube G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is slidably arranged in the tube G5122 in a vertical direction.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw portions G5121a, G5121b in a claw shape to be locked to the locked bars G511a, G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide up and down in the tube G5122 in accordance with the sliding of the locking plate G5121, whereby the locked rod inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the tube G5122. It is locked or released from G511a, G511b. In addition, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

  The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked with the locked bars G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position for locking the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked by the lower door mechanism DD. Is set so that the lock on the locked bars G511a and G511b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release position. Further, the claw portions G5121a, G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5121a, G5121b are pressed down by contact with the locked bars G511a, G511b.

  Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle. The lowering portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. Accordingly, the locking between the claw portions G5121a and G5121b and the locked bars G511a and G511b can be released by descending as the locking plate G5121 is lowered. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components and the like on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked part G521 fixed to the right end of the rear wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locked part G522 fixed to the right end of the cabinet G. Have.

  The locked portion G521 has two bar-shaped locked bars G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a concave frame G521c at upper and lower portions.

  The locking portion G522 includes a long tube G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 slidably arranged in the tube G5222 in a vertical direction.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw portions G5221a and G5221b that are claw-shaped and locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222 along with the sliding of the locking plate G5221, so that the locked rod inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It is locked to G521a, G521b, or the lock is released.

  The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked by the upper door mechanism DU. The lock on the locked bars G521a and G521b is released when the lock is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. In addition, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, so that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are pushed down by contact with the locked bars G521a and G521b.

  An opening (not shown) is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and a projection (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 is formed through the opening. It protrudes inside the cabinet G. The locking plate G5221 is lowered by pulling the projection downward, whereby the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked bars G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, the protrusion is slid upward, and is arranged so as to abut on the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU.

  According to the above configuration, in a state where the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protruding portion, so that the locking plate G5221 is prevented from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a , G5221b and the locked rods G521a, G521b cannot be released, and can be locked so that the upper door mechanism DU cannot be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the projection on the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion G522a , G5221 are unlocked from the locked rods G521a, G521b, and the lock on the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.

  Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, an unlocking operation of the lower door mechanism DD is first required by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, a lock release operation is performed on the lower door lock mechanism G51, and after the lower door mechanism DD is opened, a lock release operation on the upper door lock mechanism G52 is required. Security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. In addition, security can be enhanced in the upper space of the cabinet G more than in the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than in the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

  In order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, there is an advantage that the key is easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.

  Further, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be hooked on the locked bars G521a and G521b, and the hooks are released. Thus, the upper door mechanism DU can be locked to the upper space of the cabinet G in conjunction with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  In addition, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so that the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD greatly. Thereby, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and it is possible to enhance security.

  In the present embodiment, a one-way hinge that applies a predetermined torque in a direction in which the lower door mechanism DD closes is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. Thereby, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be closed quietly with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

  The lower door DD1 is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (the lower space side)). The reel unit RU is provided with reels RL, RC, RR and a reel drive board RD for controlling a reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside of the cabinet G (lower space side)).

  The main control board MS controls the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on command signals output from the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and the like (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped and displayed.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS by the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 The work for assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling can be easily performed.

  In addition, the main control board MS is an important component for controlling the game, and requires measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, Can be difficult.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be disposed on the far side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS can be ensured, and even if an illegal intrusion is made through a gap between the lower door DD1, the vehicle reaches the main control board MS. And security can be improved.

  Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when the specifications of the gaming machine 1 are changed, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, and the reel design of the reel unit RU is changed. And the change of the game content can be performed collectively.

(System configuration of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 includes, as main boards included in the system, a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, a scaler board SK, It includes a projector control board B23, a sub liquid crystal I / F board SL, and a screen drive control board CS. Power is supplied to the main control board MS and the sub control board SS from the power board DE1 of the power supply device DE when the power switch DE2 is turned on. Also, the gaming machine 1 includes a 7-segment display 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display, etc., a graphic board 40, Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, medal identification selector 50, door open / close monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, settlement switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60 , A group of LEDs 61 for effects and decorations, a group of speakers 62 for effects, a 24h door monitoring unit 63, and a door monitoring switch 64. The description of these known components will be omitted.

  A common harness and an optical fiber cable are used for connecting each substrate and the like. For example, the main control board MS is connected to the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30 via a harness H so as to output a control signal in one direction to each of these boards and the like. The reel drive board RD is connected to the door relay board DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals to the door relay board DS in one direction. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via a second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals to the main control board MS in one direction. Thus, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are connected in a loop through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so as to simply transmit a command or the like in one direction. The sub relay board SN is connected to a security IC 306 described later of the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external central terminal board 31 is connected to a security IC 307 described later of the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown). ) Is connected through. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal communication data by encrypting, for example, a plain text transmission command by the AES method.

  The main control board MS is a board for controlling a main game operation of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS includes a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, an I / O communication LSI 305 serving as a master, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling a reel rotation operation and a medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I / O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I / O communication LSI 305, and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. . Specific processing of such a main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

  The sub-control board SS is a board for mainly controlling an effect accompanying the game of the gaming machine 1. The sub-control board SS is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: for board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected via a harness H. Various signals are exchanged bidirectionally with these.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board SS includes a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real-time clock (RTC: Real Time Clock) 402 serving as a date / time clock circuit. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic board 40 has a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits a signal for displacing the projection planes E11a and F1a to the front screen driving mechanism E2 and the reel screen driving mechanism F2 through the sub relay board SN and the screen driving control board CS (see FIG. 42). . The sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for displaying a video on the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the like to the projector control board B23 and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

  The reel drive board RD is a board for controlling the rotation operation of the reels RL, RC, RR in the reel unit RU and for controlling the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD includes an I / O communication LSI 310 serving as a slave to the I / O communication LSI 305 serving as a master of the main control board MS, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312. For example, the I / O communication LSI 305 outputs a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from the medal supply mechanism switch MHS for detecting a medal drop to the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU indicating the rotation state of the reel, and the like. Is converted into an optical signal corresponding to a predetermined optical communication system, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Also, the I / O communication LSI 305 inputs, via the harness H, control signals from the main control board MS for starting and stopping reel rotation, paying out medals, and the like, and outputs control signals corresponding to these control signals. , And output to the reel unit RU and the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. As described above, the control signal based on the electric signal is output from the main control board MS, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2. This is because there is a problem of responsiveness with the hopper mechanism HP (a problem of transmission time due to command transmission). In short, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable, for example, in order to prevent a significant shift in the symbol stop position due to a delay when the reel is stopped after the stop button is pressed. It has become.

  The door relay board DS relays various signals in one direction from the reel drive board RD and various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. Substrate. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS includes an I / O communication LSI 500 serving as a slave to the I / O communication LSI 305 serving as a master of the main control board MS, and an external input driver 501. For example, the I / O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501 and converts the signals into optical signals corresponding to a predetermined optical communication system, and converts these optical signals. The signal is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. The I / O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD, converts the signal into an optical signal corresponding to a predetermined optical communication system, and converts the optical signal via the second optical fiber cable FC2 to the main control board. Send to MS.

  The sub-relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying a command from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS, and for relaying various signals between an effect mechanism or the like and the sub-control board SS. . As shown in FIG. 42, the sub relay board SN includes a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub-relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub-control board SS to the scaler board SK as a bypass signal, and transmits the screen drive signal from the sub-control board SS via the I2C controller 603 to the screen drive control board CS. And the detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 is exchanged with the door monitoring unit 63 for 24h. The security IC 600 receives a security command (encrypted various commands from the main control board MS) from the main control board MS, converts the security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command), and This is transmitted to the sub control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives an effect sound signal from the sub-control board SS, and transmits a signal corresponding to the sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives the lighting signal for presentation from the sub-control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and transmits the signal between the sub-control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchanges control signals and sensor signals.

  The scalar board SK mainly receives the effect video signal from the sub-control board SS, divides the video signal to generate video signals corresponding to a plurality of video display numbers, and converts these video signals into the projector device B2. And a substrate for transmission to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as a resolution conversion LSI) 710, a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711, And an SDRAM (DDR SDRAM / DDR2 SDRAM / DDR3 SDRAM, etc.) 712. The MCU 700 is connected with the sub relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and is also connected with the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the projector control board B23. The multi-output scaler LSI 710 is connected to the sub-control board SS as an input source, and is also connected to the MCU 700, the V-by-one HS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23. The V-by-one HS transmitter 711 is connected to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL as an output destination.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 forms an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 and an SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820 connected to the MCU 700 and the SDRAM 712 (not shown), and a resolution conversion output block. , A plurality of select areas (Select Areas) A to D801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) as a differential interface (1), (2) 811 and 812, and LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor) as an input / output interface. (1), (2) 813, 814, and DSF (Doub) constituting a video division block Having e Scaling Filter) (α) 821, DSF (β) 822.

  The multi-output scaler LSI 710 is, for example, one that divides and converts the resolution of an LVDS signal as a video signal and outputs it. More specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub-control board SS into two using DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822, Further, the resolution is converted to a predetermined resolution by each of the four select areas A to D 801 to 804. Thereafter, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 mainly outputs the LVDS signals for projector display (single signals of LVDS1 and LVDS2) through the LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, and also LVTTL (1) and (2) 813. , 814 to output LVTTL signals for sub-liquid crystal display (RGBTTL signals of LVTTL1 and LVTTL2). The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is transmitted directly or through the MCU 700 to the projector control board B23, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or the MCU 700. Is done. Specific processing of such a scaler board SK (MCU 700, multi-output scaler LSI 710) will be described later.

  The sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL relays a video signal (LVTTL signal) mainly from the scalar substrate SK to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and also connects between the sub control substrate SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scalar substrate SK. It is a board for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL has an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL receives a video signal from the scaler substrate SK by the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 generates a control signal for driving the liquid crystal based on the video signal. While transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the LED driver IC 903 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image is displayed at a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives an operation signal from the touch panel DD19T, and transmits a signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub-control board SS via the scalar board SK. Thereby, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS recognizes the input operation according to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not particularly shown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 incorporates a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and a temperature detection signal from this temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL, so that the sub liquid crystal The MCU 900 of the I / F board SL can recognize the temperature during operation. Specific processing of such a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (MCU 900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Image split display pattern)
In the present embodiment, when displaying an effect image on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2, the sub control board SS or the sub control substrate SS is configured to form a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. An image is displayed when the scaler board SK performs signal processing. In other words, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of 1280 × 800 resolution) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (480 × 800 resolution). By combining the data block with the data block indicated by “β”, the LVDS dual-in signal including one combined signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

  The scaler substrate SK generates two video data α, β from the LVDS dual-in signal by the DSF (α), (β) 821, 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and buffers the video data α, β by SDRAM 712. To be stored temporarily. The video data α and β are developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 in an array image as shown on the left side of FIG.

  Thereafter, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVDS1 signal (a video signal indicated by “A” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) through the select area A 801 and the LVDS (1) 811 for projector display. Then, this LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVTTL1 signal for sub-liquid crystal display (a video signal indicated by “C” with a resolution of 480 × 800) through the select area C803 and LVTTL (1) 813, This LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector B2 can project an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on a screen at a resolution equivalent to 480 × 800 pixels.

  Note that, as the divided display pattern, the modified examples shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can be realized in accordance with a change in the display mode such as a change in the number of screens (display devices) for displaying an image or a change in the magnification related to the resolution. ing.

(Modification 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (a data block indicated by “α” of 1280 × 800 resolution) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (1024 × 768 resolution). By combining the data block with the data block indicated by “β”, the LVDS dual-in signal including one combined signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

  At this time, the scaler board SK converts the two video data α and β divided by the DSFs (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal into input data as shown in the left side of FIG. The image is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image of the pattern 1 or the input pattern 2.

  If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801 and 802 and the LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1), (2) Convert to LVDS1 + 2 signal (video signal indicated by “A + B” of 1280 × 800 resolution) through 811 and 812, and transmit this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 to the LVTTL1 + 2 signal (“C + D of resolution 1024 × 768”) for the sub liquid crystal display through the select areas C, D803, 804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814. ), And transmits the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device (for example, WXGA: abbreviation for Wide-XGA) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and switches the sub-display device DD20 to a sub-liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: Extended Graphics Array). (Abbreviation), an image can be displayed on the screen at a resolution corresponding to 1024 × 768 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801 and 802 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through the LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, for example, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio, and the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C and D 803 and 804 and the LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814, for example, at a resolution of 1280 × 800 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change , And the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS. In the projector device and the sub-liquid crystal display device, the resolution suitable for the display characteristic unique to each device is appropriate. Image can be displayed on the display.

(Modification 2)
For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (a data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and two video data for sub liquid crystal display (resolution By combining the 800 × 480 data block indicated by “β-1” and the 800 × 480 resolution “β-2” data block), the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is converted into a scaler board SK. Send to

  At this time, the scaler board SK converts the three video data α, β-1, and β-2 divided by the DSFs (α), (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal into The image is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with any one of the arrangement images of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left.

  If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801 and 802 and the LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1), (2) Convert to LVDS1 + 2 signals (video signals indicated by “A + B” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) through 811 and 812, and transmit the LVDS1 + 2 signals A + B to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 to the select area C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814, and the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” with a resolution of 800 × 480), and converts the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device (for example, FHD: abbreviation for Full-HD) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and as a sub liquid crystal display device, another sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and another. When a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, it is possible to display an image on each screen with a resolution corresponding to 800 × 480 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into the select areas A, B 801 and 802 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through the LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, for example, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio, and the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 converts the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814 to the set value of the enlargement ratio change. Is converted into an LVTTL1 signal C and an LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of, for example, 1280 × 800, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. . In this case, the LVDS1 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and two sub liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) In (2), an image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device.

(Modification 3)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub-control board SS includes two video data for display on the projector (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” with a resolution of 800 × 480) and By combining two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by “β-1” and “β-2” with a resolution of 800 × 480), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal is converted to a scaler board. Send to SK.

  At this time, the scalar board SK includes four pieces of video data α-1, α-2, β-1, and β-divided by DSF (α), (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 as one of the input images of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG.

  If the change in the enlargement ratio (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK selects the two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the upper right of FIG. Through the areas A and B 801 and 802 and the LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, they are converted into an LVDS1 signal and an LVDS2 signal (video signals indicated by “A” and “B” with a resolution of 800 × 480) for projector display, These LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 to the select area C, D803, 804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814, and the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” with a resolution of 800 × 480), and converts the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. Accordingly, the projector device projects an image at a resolution equivalent to the number of pixels of 800 × 480, and when the sub liquid crystal device is provided with the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and two separate display devices, it is 800 × 480. An image can be displayed on each screen at a resolution equivalent to the number of 480 pixels.

  On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through the select areas A and B 801 and 802 and the LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, the signals are converted into the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of 1280 × 720, for example, according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change. The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 converts the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803, 804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 813, 814 to the set value of the enlargement ratio change. Is converted into an LVTTL1 signal C and an LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of, for example, 1024 × 768, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. . In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS, and in the projector device and the three sub liquid crystal display devices, Video can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for display characteristics unique to the device.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” or the like) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (“β” or the like). In some cases, a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to the respective data blocks are sequentially transmitted to the scalar board SK by sequentially outputting the respective data blocks. Also in such a case, the signal processing similar to the above-described divided display pattern can output the LVDS signal and the LVTTL signal indicating a predetermined resolution separately. It is possible to appropriately display an image at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics of the image. In the present embodiment and the first to sixth modifications, three types of resolutions, that is, FHD, WXGA, and XGA, are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to these. (Array), a higher definition video may be displayed by using a display device corresponding to a resolution such as 2K or 4K.

  Note that the scaler substrate may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display unit. For example, the scaler substrate may generate and output a video signal for partial screen display and a video signal for partial screen display from the one video data. Further, the scaler substrate may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, it is possible to display an image in a 3D display method using parallax based on the left-eye video signal and the right-eye video signal from the scaler substrate. In the projector device, a stereoscopic image can be displayed not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. Images with a sense and power can be displayed.

(Communication specifications of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, the communication specifications between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK, between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23, and between the scaler board SK and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL include a communication format and a communication The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bits, presence / absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are defined as shown. The IDs are shown separately for easy identification of the transmission source ID and the transmission destination ID, but are actually one-byte single data. For example, the ID when the sub-control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK is 21H as data indicating the ID by combining the transmission source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, a communication line between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, and a communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line. The communication line between the SK and the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, commands exchanged between the scalar board SK and the sub-control board SS include, as commands transmitted from the scalar board SK, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter request”, “status”, “status”. In addition to "Reception confirmation" and "Error notification", commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, "Start parameter request confirmation", "Setting completed", "Status request", "Status request completed", “Output screen division setting number”, “output screen resolution setting”, “input screen division setting number”, and “input screen resolution setting” are defined. Contents and parameters of each command (including data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a command exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL and the sub control substrate SS is a command transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter "Request", "Status", "Reception confirmation", "Error notification" are specified, and commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, "Start parameter request confirmation", "Setting completion", "Status request". , "Status request completed", "sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting", and "sub liquid crystal luminance setting". The contents and parameters (including data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) of each command are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a command exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub-control board SS is a command transmitted from the projector control board B23, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter request”, “reception confirmation”. "," Error notification "," LED temperature "," FAN (fan) rotation speed "," LED brightness "," Horizontal adjustment value "," Vertical adjustment value "," Focus adjustment value "," Drift correction temperature " Are defined, and commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completed”, “status request”, “status request completed”, “LED brightness setting”, “LED brightness setting”. Keystone distortion correction value, White color temperature setting, Horizontal position offset, Horizontal position adjustment value, Vertical position offset, Straight position adjustment value "," Brightness setting "," Contrast setting "," gamma setting "," focus offset "," focus adjustment value "," focus drift correction value "," test pattern "is defined. Contents and parameters of each command (including data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the error information transmitted by the error notification transmission command from the scaler board SK includes “self-diagnosis (RAM check) error”, “scalar output setting error”, “scalar input setting error”, and “WDT”. (Watchdog timer) -scaler ", and a parameter (including a data position" D1 "in the communication format), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined for each error. The error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL by an error notification transmission command includes “self-diagnosis (RAM check) error”, “touch panel input error”, “sub liquid crystal screen setting error”, “sub liquid crystal screen setting error”. There are "temperature abnormality" and "WDT-sub liquid crystal", and a parameter (including a data position "D1" in a communication format), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined for each error. The error information transmitted by the error notification transmission command from the projector control board B23 includes “LED (R) temperature abnormal”, “LED (G) temperature abnormal”, “LED (B) temperature abnormal”, and “FAN1 rotation”. Abnormal "," FAN2 rotation abnormality "," FAN3 rotation abnormality "," Voltage abnormality "," Self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality ", and" WDT-DLP ". Each error has a parameter (data in communication format) The position “D1” or “D2”), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined. Note that an error management area (a memory map of the SDRAM shown in FIG. 96, a memory map of the DRAM shown in FIG. 106, a memory map of the DRAM shown in FIG. 116, and a memory of the DRAM shown in FIG. 116) of a later-described scaler substrate SK, a projector control substrate B23, and a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of PC 1000 for adjustment)
As shown in FIG. 58, the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000 includes a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage as work areas of predetermined application software when optical adjustment is performed on the projector apparatus B2. An area is provided. In the storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000, as the items related to the optical adjustment, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion Correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, contrast settings, gamma settings, test patterns, horizontal positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, and the like are provided. Specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing of when the power is turned on by the main CPU300]
FIG. 59 shows a process performed when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 300 performs power-on processing (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and performs initialization according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this processing, the main CPU 300 initializes, for example, by specifying a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. This clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 301.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S103). In this process, the main CPU 300 sets an active line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether or not a start operation is possible.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area. The random number value is used in the next internal lottery process.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes an area related to control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation and storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS by a command transmission process. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game state, etc.) necessary for the effect, such as an internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can perform an effect according to the start operation.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a wait process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 300 stands by so as not to receive a start operation or the like until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the previous game.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start process (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the rotation start of the reels RL, RC, RR.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start command generation and storage process (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the command transmission processing. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a pull-in priority storing process (S111). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the draw-in priority of the winning combination and stores the draw-in priority data in a predetermined storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel stop control process (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this processing, the main CPU 300 compares the symbol combination displayed along the activated line with the symbol combination table after the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped, determines the display combination, and determines the number of tokens to be paid out. Do.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation and storage process (S114). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a winning operation command and stores the generated winning operation command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning operation command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS in a command transmission process. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can determine the effect contents and the like according to the winning.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout process (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the payout number of medals determined in the process of S113.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout end command generation and storage process (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS in a command transmission process. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can recognize the end of the payout of the medals.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when a condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. Note that the main CPU 300 performs the re-game operation when the re-game condition is satisfied. After execution of S118, the main CPU 300 shifts to the processing of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing under control of main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interruption process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves the register at a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an input port check process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 300 checks whether or not there is an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch board 55, and the like for each interruption process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores an input state command corresponding to an input signal from various switches or the like in a transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in a data transmission process described later. Thereby, various effects according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, RR can be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a timer update process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the timer set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs an effect timer updating process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel control process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to a request to start the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, in response to the start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, RR rotate. In addition, in response to the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a 7SEG driving process (S126). In this processing, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 300 performs a data transmission process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub control board SS via the security IC 306.

  Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). After that, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt processing.

(Memory map of sub-control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub RAM board 41, the SRAM 401, and the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS are provided with various areas for performing optical adjustment on the projector B2.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a part of a work area (for example, an area used in a task system, an LED control task to be described later) for the sub CPU 400 of the sub control The sub-device reception storage area, sub-device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub liquid crystal control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, flag, etc. The storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub LCD setting value storage area, sub LCD setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, and drift correction storage area Is provided. For example, the flag storage area includes an EXT reception flag, a reception completion flag, a scaler setting completion flag, a sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, a projector setting completion flag, a scaler setting changing flag, a sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, and a projector setting changing flag. , A setting-in-progress flag at the start of the scaler, a setting-in-progress flag in the sub-liquid crystal, and a setting-in-progress flag in the projector. The touch panel input storage area stores an input type, an input X coordinate, and an input Y coordinate. The drift correction storage area is provided with a drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area. Note that the sub device means a front screen driving mechanism E2 and a reel screen driving mechanism F2 in addition to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2 controlled by the sub control circuit SS. These stored information will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the SRAM 401, a part of the data that can be backed up (for example, data in an area where a game state, an RT state, and the like are backed up is not shown), a scalar set value storage area, a sub liquid crystal display, and the like. A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler setting value storage area, the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, the input screen 1 Screens 1 and 2 store vertical resolution. The sub liquid crystal setting value storage area stores a sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, a sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and a sub liquid crystal luminance as sub liquid crystal setting values. In the projector setting value storage area, as the projector setting values, horizontal position A to E offset, horizontal position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, vertical direction A to E adjustment value, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED luminance settings, trapezoidal distortion correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, contrast settings, gamma settings, and test patterns are stored. These setting values will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a part of the fixed data (the control program of the sub-control board SS, various lottery values required for the game, video data, sound data, LED data, ) Operation data and the like are not shown), a scaler initial value area, a sub liquid crystal initial value area, and a projector initial value area are provided. The scaler initial value area includes the output screen division setting number, input screen division setting number, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screen 1 and 2 horizontal The resolution, the input screen 1, and the vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal luminance are stored in the sub liquid crystal initial value area. The projector initial value area includes horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction value A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Gamma setting, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, and test pattern are stored. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub-control board SS)
[Processing at Power-on by Sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows a process performed when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of the sub control board SS (S131). In this process, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system such as error checking of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM board 41 (RAM clear and backup data set of the SRAM 401, etc.). The task system includes an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a sub device task, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main task described later (see FIG. 69).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power-off recovery process (S139). In this process, the sub CPU 400 performs a process of restoring backup data at the time of power failure. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of turning on the power.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process for LED-related data (S141).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED data analysis process (S142).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED effect execution process (S143).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 4 msec (S144). After that, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S142.

[Sound control task]
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs initialization processing of sound-related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound data analysis process (S152).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S152.

[Screen Property Control Task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 operate normally when the power is turned on (S161). For example, as a test, first, the reel screen mechanism E1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position. When an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, a display notifying the abnormality is displayed from the projector device B2, and a message notifying the occurrence of the abnormality is requested to be output from the sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is registered screen accessory data (S162). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not screen accessory data requesting the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41. If there is screen accessory data (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S163. If the screen accessory data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S164.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory operation construction process (S163). In this process, the sub CPU 400 constructs an operation pattern of the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As an operation pattern of the screen driving mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, when image data is projected on the reel screen mechanism F1 while image data is projected on the front screen mechanism E1 (front screen mechanism When the accessory data for instructing the storage operation to E1 is not registered), the sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and sets the front screen. After the mechanism E1 is stored in the upper part, an operation pattern is constructed in the order in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display surface.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 2 msec (S165). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S162.

[Screen accessory control processing]
FIG. 67 shows a screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step and generates a change in the screen (projection target) from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the above-described screen accessory operation construction processing. Is determined (S171). When the change of the screen corresponds to the occurrence of the screen change in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S172. If it is not the operation start step or does not correspond to the occurrence of a screen change (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S173.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus change request process (S172). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a front screen control process (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 to move the front screen mechanism E1.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a reel screen control process (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen driving mechanism F2 to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is −1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when changing the focus position with respect to the projector device B2. When the value of the focus standby counter is −1 (S175: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. If the value of the focus standby counter is not −1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S176.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). If the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S178. If the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S177.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 subtracts 1 from the value of the focus standby counter (S177). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

  In S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the focus position after the change. In this processing, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. Thus, for example, when the projection target of the video is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1, or vice versa, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. By controlling the focus mechanism 242 based on the request data, the focus of the projection lens 210 can be adjusted to a focus position corresponding to each of the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 to the focus standby counter (S179). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Focus change request processing]
FIG. 68 shows a focus change request process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 acquires the current focus position (focus position A to E offset) from the current operation state of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus positions (focus positions A to E offset) from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered character data (S182).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The number of focus change pulses is the number of pulses of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when changing the focus position, and is the required number of pulses corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting the changed focus position from the current focus position. It is calculated as an absolute value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is the actual operation time of the focus mechanism 242 for changing the focus position. For example, when the motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave having a duty ratio of 0.5, the time (pulse width) of the pulse width is doubled. Cycle) is multiplied by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the setting of the focus position by communication with the projector control board B23 (S185). The setting change transmission time includes a transmission time 1 for data exchanged between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK in accordance with the setting change of the focus position, and a transmission time for data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23. It is calculated as the sum of time 2 and time. The transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data × (data length + parity + start + stop), by 1 / baud rate 1. Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1 / baud rate 2. In the present embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, the start and stop bits are 1 bit, and the transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained using these numerical values. Is calculated.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as the sum of the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not to change to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187). In the case of changing to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S188. If the change to the front screen mechanism E1 is not made (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S189.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a movement time 1 for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This moving time 1 is the actual working time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. The calculated time is multiplied by the required number of motor pulses. After that, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates a moving time 2 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. The calculated time is multiplied by the required number of motor pulses.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates A value corresponding to the time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, regarding the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, a value that is just the required time difference is not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image of good image quality with focus on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 immediately after the movement by changing the focus position.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlocking when displaying an image (for example, “1” when there is a focus interlocking flag (not shown), and “0” when there is no focus interlocking flag (S191)) (S191). . The focus interlock means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. If there is no focus interlock (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S192. If there is the focus interlock (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when the focus linkage is not performed, the focus position is changed immediately at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, and when the focus linkage is performed, the focus position is changed at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 ends. Changes are completed. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request processing.

[Main task]
FIG. 69 illustrates a main task performed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization: vertical synchronization signal) interrupt initialization processing (S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt occurring at a period of 33 msec (S202).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a drawing process (S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watchdog timer (WDT) (S204). After that, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes a communication message queue (S211).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a received command (S213). If there is a received command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S214. When there is no reception command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S218.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the received command (S214).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the received command is a valid command (S215). If the received command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S216. If the received command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S218. The validity of the received command means that the value of the command is, for example, in the range of 01H to 10H.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the received command, and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). The game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a game state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a command analysis process (S217). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 10 msec (S218). After that, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows a command analysis process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an effect content determination process (S222).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an animation data determination process (S223).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED data determination process (S224).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory data determination process (S226).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 registers the determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41 (S227). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis processing.

[Animation task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks for a change from the previous game information (S231).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main object control process (S232).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main animation task management process (S233).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub object control process (S234).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 33 msec (S236). After that, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S231.

[Sub Device Task]
FIG. 73 shows a sub device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device initialization process (S241). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control process (S243). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control process (S244). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a period of, for example, 10 msec (S245). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S242.

[Sub device reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows the sub device reception interrupt processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub device reception interruption process is a reception interruption process for taking in communication data transmitted by the scaler board SK in response to an external request from a sub device (the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the touch panel DD19T, the projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the data received from the sub device is 'STX' indicating the start of data (S251). If the received data is 'STX (Start of TeXt: 02H)' (S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S252. If the received data is not “STX” (S251: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S253.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "OFF", and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt processing.

  In S253, sub CPU 400 stores the received data in the sub device reception storage area of sub RAM board 41.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the data received from the sub device is “ETX” indicating the end of the data (S254). If the received data is “ETX (End of TeXt: 03H)” (S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S255. If the received data is not “ETX” (S254: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S256.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "ON" (S255). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt processing.

  In S256, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of sub RAM board 41 is "ON". If the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S257. If the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device received data sum check process (S257).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S260. If the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S259. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the reception data up to 'ETX', excluding 'STX' of the reception data, is added, and the reception data after 'ETX' is received. By checking the received data, the consistency of the sum value is determined. The method of calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition method, but may be a subtraction method or an exclusive OR (also referred to as BCC).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt processing.

  In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to “ON”. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt processing.

[Sub device initialization processing]
FIG. 75 shows a sub device initialization process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU400 initializes the first serial line as a communication line with the scaler board SK (S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scalar set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scalar set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scalar setting values are the output screen division setting number, input screen division setting number, output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, input screen 1 This corresponds to a device profile indicating control characteristics of the scalar board SK such as the screen 1 and the vertical resolution.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of the scalar set value stored in the scalar set value storage area (S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the scalar setting values in the scalar setting value storage area are within the effective range (S274). The effective range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub-control board SS, as shown in FIG. When all the scaler setting values are within the valid range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S276. If at least one of the scaler setting values is not within the valid range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S275.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scalar set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scalar set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S275). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the scaler setting value is written in the scaler initial value area of the sub-ROM board 42 in advance.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal set value corresponds to a device profile indicating the display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, such as the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal luminance.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process on the range of the sub liquid crystal set value stored in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S277).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the sub liquid crystal setting values in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area are within the effective range (S278). If all the sub liquid crystal setting values are within the effective range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S280. If at least one sub liquid crystal setting value is not within the valid range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S279.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S279). The initial value of the sub liquid crystal setting value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM board 42 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector setting values are the horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the horizontal position A to E offset, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E offset, and the focus position offset. A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and focus drift correction values A to E correspond to device profiles indicating display characteristics of the projector B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process on the range of the projector setting value stored in the projector setting value storage area (S281).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the projector setting values in the projector setting value storage area are within the valid range (S282). When all the projector setting values are within the valid range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S284. If at least one of the projector setting values is not within the valid range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S283.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S283). The initial values of the projector setting values are written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub ROM board 42 as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "OFF" (S284). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization processing.

[Scalar control processing]
FIG. 76 shows a scaler control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates 'scaler (see ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)'. Is determined (S291). When the transmission source ID indicates 'scaler' (S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S292. When the transmission source ID does not indicate 'scaler' (S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '01H' to '05H' indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. And returns the check result as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result (S293). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S294. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S295.

  Next, because the consistency of the received data is abnormal (invalid received data), the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area (S294). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

  In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving scaler control. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows a process at the time of receiving scaler control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “start parameter request” (S302). If the received command is “start parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” (S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S303. If the received command is not the “start parameter request” (S302: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S304.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving a scaler activation parameter request (S303). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  In S304, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the received command is “parameter request” (S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S305. If the received command is not “parameter request” (S304: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S311.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a scalar setting value change request (CMD: 02H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S305). If there is a request to change the scaler set value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S306. If there is no request to change the scaler set value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S309.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scalar setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "ON" (S306).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 executes the scalar setting change processing by using the acquired setting change contents as an argument (a general name of a parameter on software indicating that the caller transfers a parameter to a subroutine function (process) of the callee). Is performed (S308). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  In S309, the sub CPU 400 issues a status request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is. If there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S310. If there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler board SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  In S311, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “status” (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54). When the received command is “status” (S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S312. If the received command is not “status” (S311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S313.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the scaler status command (S312). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

  In S313, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the received command is “reception confirmation” (S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S314. If the received command is not “reception confirmation” (S313: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S315.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process for receiving a scalar reception confirmation (S314). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)”. If the received command is “error notification” (S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S316. If the received command is not “error notification” (S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scalar control.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a scalar error occurs (S316).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scalar error occurrence output to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the scalar board SK by sound, and at the same time, instructs the LED group 61 to notify the error in a light emitting mode. An LED scaler error occurrence lighting request is performed (S317). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

[Processing at the time of receiving the scaler activation parameter request]
FIG. 78 shows a process at the time of receiving a scalar activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “confirmation of activation parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” to the scaler board SK.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler start-up setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "ON" (S322). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler activation parameter request.

[Scalar setting change processing]
FIG. 79 shows a scaler setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332). When the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S333. If the content of the setting change is not the output screen division setting number (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S334.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs output screen division setting number command transmission processing (S333). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and designates an “output screen” for designating output patterns 0 to 3 as the output screen division setting numbers 1 to 4. A command of the number of divisions set (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54) is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  In S334, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change is an output screen resolution setting. If the content of the setting change is the output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S335. If the content of the setting change is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S336.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs output screen resolution setting command transmission processing (S335). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the output screen resolution as output screen numbers (1 to 4), horizontal resolution (480 to 4060), vertical A command of “output screen resolution setting (refer to CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for designating the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Specifically, as an example, when the output screen division setting number is “2”, the output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK twice (two cycles (400 msec)). The first output screen number: 1, the horizontal resolution and the vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 1, the second output screen number: 2, and the horizontal resolution and the vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 2 Sent. Similarly, in the case of an input screen resolution setting command described later, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK a number of times corresponding to the number of input screen division settings.

  In S336, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen division setting number. When the setting change content is the input screen division setting number (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S337. If the setting change content is not the input screen division setting number (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S338.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen division setting number command transmission process (S337). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and designates 1 or 2 as the input screen division setting number. CMD shown in the right column: 07H) 'is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  In S338, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change is an input screen resolution setting. If the content of the setting change is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S339. If the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the input screen resolution setting as the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen number (1, 2). A command of “input screen resolution setting (refer to CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for designating the horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and the vertical resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler board SK. . After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Such a scalar setting change process is executed when an operator of a gaming machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Process when receiving scaler status command]
FIG. 80 shows a process at the time of receiving a scalar status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is the output setting based on the value (S341). When the status type is the output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S342. If the status type is not the output setting (S341: No), that is, if the status is the input setting, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S343.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the output screen resolution data stored after “D2” of the status reception data in the scalar setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes the number of output divisions (1 to 4), the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution (0 to 4060), and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution (0 to 1600). Is included. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S344.

  In S343, the sub CPU 400 stores the input screen resolution data stored after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the number of input divisions (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). It is.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request to the scaler board SK. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler status command.

[Scalar reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 81 shows a process at the time of scalar reception confirmation reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scalar setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is “ON” (S351). If the scalar setting change flag is “ON” (S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S352. If the scalar setting change flag is not “ON” (S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scalar reception confirmation reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the scaler setting value before the change) from the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S352).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler setting value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). If the scalar setting value storage area is the end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S356. If the scalar setting value storage area is not the end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S354.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This process is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the scaler setting value storage area (S355). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scalar reception confirmation.

  In S356, sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating “setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” of the scaler set value to the scaler board SK.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scalar setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "OFF" (S357). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scalar reception confirmation.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows a sub liquid crystal control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “sub liquid crystal (see ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)”. It is determined whether or not it is (S361). When the transmission source ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S362. If the transmission source ID does not indicate 'sub liquid crystal' (S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '41H' to '45H' indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL shown in FIG. And returns the check result as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result (S363). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S364. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S365.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control processing.

  In S365, sub CPU 400 performs processing at the time of sub liquid crystal control reception. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control processing.

[Sub LCD control reception processing]
FIG. 83 shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” (S372). When the received command is “start parameter request” (S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S373. If the received command is not the “start parameter request” (S372: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S374.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request (S373). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

  In S374, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. If the received command is “parameter request” (S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S375. If the received command is not “parameter request” (S374: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S381.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value based on the parameter value (see D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) included in the parameter request reception command (see FIG. 55, left column). S375). If there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S376. If there is no request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S379.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "ON" (S376).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change contents (the sub liquid crystal set value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

  In S379, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL based on the parameter value included in the parameter request reception command (see D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). Determine. If there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S380. If there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S380). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

  In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “status” (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). If the received command is 'status' (S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S382. If the received command is not “status” (S381: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S383.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a sub liquid crystal status command is received (S382). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

  In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. If the received command is “reception confirmation” (S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S384. If the received command is not “reception confirmation” (S383: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S385.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process (S384). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)”. If the received command is “error notification” (S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S386. If the received command is not the “error notification” (S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a sub liquid crystal error occurs (S386).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound sub liquid crystal error occurrence output to the speaker group 62 to notify an error of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the touch panel DD19T) by sound, and at the same time, outputs the sound. An LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is made to the LED group 61 to notify the error by the light emission mode (S387). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

[Processing when sub LCD start parameter request is received]
FIG. 84 shows a process at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation” to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal start-up setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "ON" (S392). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request.

[Sub LCD setting change processing]
FIG. 85 shows a sub liquid crystal setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the sub liquid crystal setting value received as an argument (S401).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S403. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S404.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets a command for setting the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). Is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change processing.

  In S404, sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a sub liquid crystal luminance setting or not. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S405. If the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal luminance setting command transmission process (S405). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal luminance in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column in FIG. 55) for setting the sub liquid crystal luminance. It transmits to the liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change processing.

[Process when receiving sub LCD status command]
FIG. 86 shows a process at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is a touch input based on the value (S411). When the status type is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S412. If the status type is not a touch input (S411: No), that is, if the status is a liquid crystal setting, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S413.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes an input type and input X and Y coordinates regarding the touch panel DD19T. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S414.

  In step S413, the sub CPU 400 saves the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes a horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and a vertical resolution (200 to 800).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command.

[Sub LCD reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 87 shows a process at the time of sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is “ON” (S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting change flag is “ON” (S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S422. If the sub liquid crystal setting change flag is not “ON” (S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 obtains the setting change contents (the sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM board 41 (S422).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423). If the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area is an end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S426. If the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area is not the end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S424.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (S425). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

  In S426, sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) indicating the completion of the setting of the sub liquid crystal set value to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "OFF" (S427). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates “projector (ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)”. Is determined (S431). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S431: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S432. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control received data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. And returns the check result as a return value.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result (S433). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S434. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S435.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

  In S435, sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of projector control reception. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector drift process (S436). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing when receiving projector control]
FIG. 89 shows a process at the time of projector control reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “start parameter request (see CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” (S442). If the received command is “start parameter request” (S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S443. If the received command is not “start parameter request” (S442: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S444.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving a projector activation parameter request (S443). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of projector control reception.

  In S444, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the received command is “parameter request” (S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S445. If the received command is not “parameter request” (S444: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S451.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a request to change the projector setting value (see CMD: 82H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S445). If there is a request to change the projector setting value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S446. If there is no request to change the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S449.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to “ON” (S446).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of projector control reception.

  In S449, the sub CPU 400 sends a status request from the projector control board B23 (see CMD: 82H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is. If there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S450. If there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of projector control reception.

  In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the received command is “reception confirmation” (S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S452. If the received command is not “reception confirmation” (S451: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S453.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of projector reception confirmation reception (S452). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is “error notification (see CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the received command is “error notification” (S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S454. If the received command is not “error notification” (S453: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S455.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification (S454). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of projector control reception.

  In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). If the received command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S456. If the received command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the projector status (S456). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of projector control reception.

[Processing when receiving projector start parameter request]
FIG. 90 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an activation parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “confirmation of request for activation parameter” to the projector control board B23.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector start-up setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to “ON” (S462). Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the projector start-up parameter request.

[Projector setting change process]
FIG. 91 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S472). If the content of the setting change is the horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S473. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S474.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets a command for setting the horizontal position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 88H shown) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset). If the content of the setting change is the vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S475. If the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S476.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S475). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical direction position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets a command for setting the vertical position offset (the right column in FIG. 56). CMD: 8AH shown) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S476, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). If the content of the setting change is the focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S477. If the setting change is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S478.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S477). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets a command for setting the focus position offsets A to E (CMD: 8FH) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S478, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). If the setting change is focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S479. If the setting change is not focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S480.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S479). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets a command for setting the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S480, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change is LED brightness setting. If the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S481. If the setting change is not the LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S482.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command for setting the LED brightness (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board. Transmit to B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S482, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S483. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S484.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission process (S483). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). This is transmitted to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S484, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. If the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S485. If the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S486.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command for setting the contrast (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. Send to. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S486, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is gamma setting. If the content of the setting change is the gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S487. If the setting change content is not the gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S488.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command for setting the gamma value (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. Send to Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the content of the setting change is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S489. If the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S490.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S489). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command for setting the white color temperature (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control. It is transmitted to the substrate B23. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S490, sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. If the setting change is brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S491. If the content of the setting change is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S492.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. To send. Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

  In S492, sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern or not. If the setting change is a test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S493. If the setting change is not a test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. Send to Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker at a game hall or an inspection worker performs various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipping from a factory.

[Processing when receiving projector confirmation]
FIG. 92 shows a process at the time of projector reception confirmation reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is “ON” (S501). If the projector set changing flag is 'ON' (S501: Yes), the sub CPU400 proceeds to the process in next S502. If the projector setting change flag is not “ON” (S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector reception confirmation.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503). If the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S506. If the projector setting value storage area is not the end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S504.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This processing is as shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the projector setting value storage area (S505). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the projector reception confirmation.

  In S506, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the setting of the projector setting value (see CMD: 82H in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to "OFF" (S507). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the projector reception confirmation.

[Processing when receiving projector error notification]
FIG. 93 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a projector error occurs in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request output to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL in order to display an error of the projector control substrate B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 to notify an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) by sound (S513). Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification.

[Processing when receiving projector status]
FIG. 94 shows a process at the time of projector status reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the drawing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “LED temperature (see CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” (S521). . When the type of the command is “LED temperature” (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S522. If the command type is not “LED temperature” (S521: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S523.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED temperature data included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S522). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 upon reception is “FAN rotation speed (see CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the command type is “FAN rotation speed” (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S524. If the type of the command is not “FAN rotation speed” (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S525.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the fan speed data included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56, see D1 to D3) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S524). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the type of the command is “LED brightness” (S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S526. When the type of the command is not “LED brightness” (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S527.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED luminance data included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 87H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the type of the command is “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next step S528. When the type of the command is not “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S529.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the horizontal adjustment value included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S528). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by the reception is “vertical direction adjustment value (CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the type of the command is “vertical adjustment value” (S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S530. When the type of the command is not “vertical direction adjustment value” (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S531.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the vertical adjustment value included in the obtained command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 89H, D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S530). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the type of the command is “focus adjustment value” (S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S532. If the command type is not the “focus adjustment value” (S531: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S533.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the focus adjustment value included in the obtained command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8AH, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S532). Thereafter, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S535.

  In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “drift correction temperature (CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the type of the command is “drift correction temperature” (S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S534. If the command type is not “drift correction temperature” (S533: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S535.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the drift temperature included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S534). .

  Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S535). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of the status request (see CMD: 84H in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. Thereafter, sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception process.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM board 41 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing for periodically correcting and monitoring the temperature drift relating to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (approximately one minute) or more as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next process of S543. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S545.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (see CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) with the projector control board B23 as a transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, a drift correction temperature (CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction processing. The command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) obtained from the reception data is “drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” (S545). If the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S546. If the received command is not “drift correction temperature” (S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining an optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristic for each of the focus positions A to E. Such a position coefficient may be transmitted, for example, as a status from the projector control board B23, may be stored in advance in the sub-ROM board 42, or the like, or may be a focus position on an adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment in FIG. A menu for inputting the position coefficient may be provided and settable.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a focus drift correction value by multiplying the obtained drift correction temperature and position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the peripheral temperature around the lens.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S548). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction processing. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the next processing of S549.

  Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for a request to change the setting of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S550).

  Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S551). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction processing.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various information is stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not show all information used in the scaler board SK. For example, a control program executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK, a work area used by the MCU 700, and the like are not illustrated in FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 includes a first control for receiving each command in order to exchange commands with the sub-control board SS, the projector control board B23, and the sub-liquid crystal I / F board SL. To a third reception storage area, first to third transmission storage areas for transmitting commands to each, a scalar LSI setting storage area, a status storage area, a flag other storage area, and a multi-output scalar LSI 710 relating to the multi-output scalar LSI 710 And a scaler LSI use area of an MCU (control LSI) 700. For example, in the scaler LSI setting storage area, output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions, output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions, input first and second screen horizontal resolutions, and output first and second screen vertical resolutions are stored. You. The flag and other storage areas store first to third reception completion flags, first to third EXT reception flags, scalar LSI setting flags, reset request flags, transmission cycle counters, error management areas, and self-diagnosis storage areas. These stored information will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the ROM of the MCU 700, the output division number, the input division number, the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution, and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution are stored as the scaler LSI initial setting values. , The input first and second screen horizontal resolutions, and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions are stored, and the first to third line baud rates, the first to third line data lengths, and the To the third line parity, the first to third line stop, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later.

(Treatment of the scaler substrate SK)
[Scalar board main processing by MCU 700]
FIG. 98 shows a scalar substrate main process by the MCU 700 of the scalar substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs an initialization process of the scaler board SK (S561). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is “ON” (S562). When the first reception completion flag is “ON” (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S563. If the first reception completion flag is not “ON” (S562: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S568.

  Next, the MCU 700 acquires the reception data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas to “OFF” (S564).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the obtained received data indicates 'scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S565). If the destination ID indicates 'scaler' (S565: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S567. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate 'scaler' (S565: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S566.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub device bypass transmission process (S566). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the scaler (S567). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs processing at the time of transmission between the sub control and the scaler (S569). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-control bypass transmission process (S570). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the reset request flag in the flag of the SDRAM 712 and other storage areas is "ON" (S571). If the reset request flag is “ON” (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S572. If the reset request flag is not “ON” (S571: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S573.

  Next, the MCU 700 waits for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) (S572). Waiting for the reset of the watchdog timer is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value to) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 700. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scalar board main process (also referred to as “reboot”). The same applies to S700 of the projector control main process described later and S871 of the sub liquid crystal control main process.

  In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the MCU 700 waits for a period of, for example, 2 msec (S574). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S562.

[First serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scalar board SK. The first serial line reception interruption process is a communication interruption process for receiving reception data in response to an external request from the sub-control board BB via the first serial line while the above-described scalar board main processing is being executed. The MCU 700 is configured to execute the second serial line reception interrupt process and the third serial line reception interrupt process as well as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for receiving received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 via the second serial line, and the third serial line reception interrupt process is This is a communication interruption process for receiving received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL via the three serial lines. The second and third serial line reception interrupt processes are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt process except that the lines are different, and are not shown for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether the data received from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) is 'STX (02H)' indicating the start of data (S581). If the received data is 'STX' (S581: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next step S582. If the received data is not “STX” (S581: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S583.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to 'OFF', and clears the first reception storage area (S582). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S583, the MCU 700 stores the data received from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data is 'ETX (03H)' indicating the end of the data (S584). If the received data is 'ETX' (S584: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S585. If the received data is not “ETX” (S584: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S586.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “ON” (S585). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether the first ETX reception flag in the flag or other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is "ON". If the first ETX reception flag is “ON” (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S587. If the first ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S586: No), the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt processing.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). If the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S590. If the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next step S589. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt processing (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S590, the MCU 700 sets the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to 'ON'. After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt processing.

[Scalar initialization processing]
FIG. 100 shows a scalar initialization process by the MCU 700 of the scalar substrate SK. As shown in the drawing, the MCU 700 initializes an internal function (S601).

  Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

  Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 from the ROM (S603).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs an initial setting relating to the input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S604). In this process, the MCU 700 performs initial settings on the DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 and the select areas A to D 801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 based on the initial settings obtained from the ROM.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the scalar LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to 'OFF' (S605). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization processing.

[Sub device bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 101 shows a sub-device bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scalar board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the destination ID of the received data indicates “projector (30H)” (S611). When indicating the destination ID is 'projector' (S611: Yes), MCU700 proceeds to the process in next S612. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S611: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S614.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a second serial line transmission process (S613). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

  In step S614, the MCU 700 determines whether the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates “sub-liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)”. If the transmission destination ID indicates “sub-liquid crystal” (S614: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S615. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission processing.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a third serial line transmission process (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL to the third serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows a process at the time of reception between the sub-controller and the scaler by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 transmits a command (CMD) of the reception data (hereinafter, referred to as “acquired reception data”) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 from the sub-control board SS in S563. It is determined whether or not a status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54) '(S621). If the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S621: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S622. If the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S621: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S624.

  Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request of a command indicating “status” according to the output setting (D1: 01H) and the input setting (D1: 02H) of the “status request” to the sub-control board SS (S622). ).

  Next, the MCU 700 stores various parameter values (D1) included in the obtained received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the scaler.

  In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is "setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)". If the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S624: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of the next S625. If the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S624: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S626.

  Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the set value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

  In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the obtained received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S627. If the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S626: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S628.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to 'ON' (S627). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

  In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “the output screen division setting number (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “the number of output screen division settings” (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S629. If the command of the acquired received data is not the “output screen division setting number” (S628: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S630.

  Next, the MCU 700 stores the output screen division setting number included in the acquired reception data in the scalar LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

  In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is “output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the obtained received data is “output screen resolution setting” (S630: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S631. If the command of the acquired received data is not “output screen resolution setting” (S630: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S632.

  Next, the MCU 700 stores the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scalar LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

  In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the obtained received data is “input screen division setting number (refer to CMD: 07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the obtained received data is the “input screen division setting number” (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S633. If the command of the acquired received data is not the “input screen division setting number” (S632: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S634.

  Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen division setting number included in the acquired reception data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

  In step S634, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the obtained received data is “input screen resolution setting” (S634: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S635. If the acquired received data command is not “input screen resolution setting” (S634: No), the MCU 700 determines that the acquired received data command is “status request completed (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

  Next, the MCU 700 stores the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scalar LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

  Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request of a command indicating "reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)" in the sub-control board SS (S636). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the scaler.

[Scalar self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 103 shows a scalar self-diagnosis process by the MCU 700 of the scalar board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by a verify check (S641).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S642). If the load value matches the diagnostic value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S644. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S643.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “self-diagnosis abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S644).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645). If the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S647. If the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S646.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “WDT (watchdog timer) -scaler abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the output settings of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S647).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the output setting stored in the scalar LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting for the implementation of the multi-output scalar LSI 710 have the same setting value (S648). If the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have the same setting value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S650. If the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 is different from the actual output setting (S648: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S649.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “scalar output setting error” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

  Next, the MCU 700 reads the input settings of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S650).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the data related to the input setting stored in the scalar LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input setting for implementing the multi-output scalar LSI 710 have the same setting value (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have the same setting value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scalar self-diagnosis processing. If the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 is different from the actual input setting (S651: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next step S652.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets “scalar input setting error” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the scalar self-diagnosis processing.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows a process at the time of transmission between the sub-controller and the scaler by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S661). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring a cycle of transmitting a command from the scaler board SK.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). If the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or more than the predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S663. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub control and the scaler. In the present embodiment, since the processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec in the above-described scalar board main processing, the value of the transmission cycle counter of 100 or more means 2 msec × 100 = 200 msec or more. As a result, data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS at a cycle of approximately 200 msec. However, the present invention is not limited to this. = 100 msec period).

  Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scalar LSI setting flag in the storage area are “OFF” (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is “OFF” (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S665. If the scalar LSI setting flag is not “OFF” (S664: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S666.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “start parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” to the sub-control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S665, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

  In S666, the MCU 700 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. If there is error data in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S667. If no error data exists in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S669.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating "error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)" as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later.

  Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area to “ON” (S668). Thereafter, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

  In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request of a command indicating “acknowledgment” (S669: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S670. If there is no transmission request of the command indicating “acknowledgment” (S669: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the process of S671.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “acknowledgment” to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S670, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

  In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether there is a request to send a command indicating “status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request for a command indicating “status” (S671: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S672. If there is no transmission request of the command indicating “status” (S671: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S675.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is data related to output settings (S672). If the data in the status storage area is data relating to the output setting (D1: 01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S673. If the data in the status storage area is not the data related to the output setting, that is, the data related to the input setting (D1: 02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S674.

  Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “status” related to output setting for the sub-control board SS (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing in S673, the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing in S676.

  In step S674, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “status” related to the input setting for the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S674, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

  In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating 'parameter request' to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of the next S676.

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the scaler board SK to the sub-control board SS. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub control and the scaler.

[Sub-control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows a sub-control bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scalar board SK. As shown in the drawing, the MCU 700 determines whether the second reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is “ON” (S681). When the second reception completion flag is “ON” (S681: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next processing of S682. When the second reception completion flag is not 'ON' (S681: No), MCU700 shifts the flow to process S684.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates 'sub-control' (S682). If the transmission destination ID indicates ‘sub-control’ (S682: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S683. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub-control” (S682: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing of S684.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S687.

  In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether the third reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is "ON" (S684). When the third reception completion flag is “ON” (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S685. If the third reception completion flag is not “ON” (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission processing.

  Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates 'sub-control' (S685). If the transmission destination ID indicates ‘sub-control’ (S685: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next step S686. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub-control” (S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

  Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken into the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

  Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S687). By this transmission processing, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I / F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. Thereafter, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various information is stored in the DRAM, the EEPROM 231 included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, and the ROM included in the control LSI 230.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flag & work areas, a general setting value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas not shown. . For example, various flags & work areas include a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, an activation setting flag, a horizontal position setting flag, a vertical position setting flag, a focus position setting flag, an error management area, a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, and a reset. A request flag and a self-diagnosis storage area are stored. The general setting value storage area includes a horizontal position A to E offset, a vertical position A to E offset, a focus position offset A to E, a focus drift correction value A to E, an LED brightness setting, a trapezoidal distortion correction value, and a white color. The temperature setting, brightness setting, gamma setting, and contrast setting are stored. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment values, vertical position adjustment values, focus position adjustment values, LED luminance settings, trapezoidal distortion correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. . These stored information will be described later.

  Further, the EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic setting value storage area. The basic setting value storage area stores horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, and focus positions A to E adjustment values. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program for the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Projector control main processing by control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows a projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is "ON" (S692). If the reception completion flag is “ON” (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S693. If the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S692: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S697.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “OFF” (S694).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates 'projector (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S695). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S696. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S695: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S697.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the projector (S696). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S697). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector (S698). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the reset request flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is "ON" (S699). If the reset request flag is “ON” (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S700. If the reset request flag is not “ON” (S699: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S701.

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) (S700). Waiting for the reset of the watchdog timer is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value of) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also called “reboot”).

  In step S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a period of, for example, 4 msec (S702). After that, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows a projector serial line reception interruption process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process for receiving received data in response to an external request via the second serial line while the above-described projector control main process is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the data received from the second serial line is 'STX (02H)' indicating the start of data (S711). When the received data is “STX” (S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S712. If the received data is not “STX” (S711: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S713.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “OFF”, and clears the reception storage area (S712). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S713, the control LSI 230 saves the data received from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data is “ETX” indicating the end of the data (S714). If the received data is “ETX” (S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S715. If the received data is not “ETX” (S714: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S716.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “ON” (S715). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether the ETX reception flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is "ON". If the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S717. If the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). If the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S720. If the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S719. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt processing (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S720, the control LSI 230 sets the reception completion flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “ON”. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt processing.

[Projector initialization processing]
FIG. 109 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes an internal function (S721).

  Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) for the focus motor 242C is output, and the focus is adjusted to the focus position. The same applies to the processing of S755 described later.

  Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags & work areas of the DRAM (S727). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization processing.

[Receive process between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 110 shows the sub control-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is “status request” (S731). If the command of the received data (hereinafter, referred to as “acquired received data” in this processing) acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 is “status request” (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 The process proceeds to S732. If the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S731: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S734.

  Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in response to the "status request" of the sub-control board SS (S732).

  Next, the control LSI 230 saves various parameter values (CMD: 83H, D1, * 1, shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the projector.

  In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the obtained received data is “setting completed (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S735. If the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S734: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S736.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector internal setting change process (S735). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S737. If the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S736: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S738.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets a startup flag in the DRAM and other storage areas to “ON” (S737). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (see CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). If the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S739. If the command of the acquired received data is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S740.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector setting value storage process (S739). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S742.

  In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “CMD: 92H shown in the right column of the test pattern diagram 56)”. When the command of the acquired received data is a “test pattern” (S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S741. If the acquired received data command is not a “test pattern” (S740: No), the control LSI 230 determines that the acquired received data command is “status request completed (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. , To S742.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, a test pattern for the operator to check the adjustment condition when performing the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is displayed as a projected image by the projector device B2. When displaying the test pattern, a simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of the simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the control LSI 230 registers a transmission request for a command indicating 'acknowledgment' (S742). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the projector.

[Projector internal setting change processing]
FIG. 111 shows a projector internal setting change process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the drawing, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the activation setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is “ON” (S751). When the activation setting flag is “ON” (S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S752. If the activation setting flag is not “ON” (S751: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S757.

  Next, the control LSI 230 reads the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, The value of the color temperature setting, the value of the brightness setting, the value of the gamma setting, and the value of the contrast setting are acquired (S752).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the focus position A adjustment value + the focus position offset A as the focus position control data value (S754).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets all setting flags in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “OFF” (S756). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of position (A to E) is set in the horizontal position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM. When the type of position is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S758. If the type of position is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S760.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a horizontal position (change) adjustment value + a horizontal position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the horizontal position of the video projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the control data value of the horizontal position is the horizontal position B adjustment value + the horizontal position B offset.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flag in the work area (S759). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S763.

  In S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of position (A to E) is set in the vertical position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM. When the type of position is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S761. If the type of position is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S7640.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value + a vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of the video projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flag in the work area (S762).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  In S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position type (A to E) is set in the focus position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM. If the type of position is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S765. If the type of position is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

  Next, the control LSI 230 calculates, as the control data value of the focus position, a value that is a focus position (change) adjustment value + a focus position offset (change) + focus drift correction (change) (S765). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags & focus position setting flags in the work area of the DRAM (S766).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765, as in S755 (S767). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

[Projector setting value storage processing]
FIG. 112 shows a projector setting value storage process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the drawing, the control LSI 230 performs a setting range determination process based on the data of the setting value of the reception data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination process, it is determined whether or not the value is within the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines from the return value of the determination result whether or not the data of the acquired set value is valid data (S772). When the acquired data of the set value is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S773. If the data of the acquired setting value is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired setting value is a type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (basic setting value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and EEPROM shown in FIG. 106). (S773). If the acquired setting value is the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231, that is, the general setting value to be stored in the DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and the DRAM shown in FIG. 106). ), Etc. (S773: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S776.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the acquired data is “adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)” (S774). If the transmission source ID is “adjustment PC” (S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S775. If the transmission source ID is not “PC for adjustment” (S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 saves the obtained set value in a designated position of the basic set value storage area (see the EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) of the EEPROM 231 (S775). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing. Thus, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 in accordance with the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

  In S776, the control LSI 230 saves the obtained set value at a designated position in the general set value storage area of the DRAM (refer to the DRAM shown in FIG. 106). Thus, the general setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by operating the adjustment PC 1000 but also by using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the installation value is a horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S779.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the type of position (A to E) in the horizontal position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM (S778). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  In S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the set value is a vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is the vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S780. When the type of the installation value is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S781.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the type of position (A to E) in the vertical position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM (S780). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  In S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the set value is the focus position offset. When the type of the set value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S782. If the type of the installation value is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the type of position (AE) in the focus position setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM (S782). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows a projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by a verify check (S791).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S792). When the load value matches the diagnosis value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S794. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S793.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “self-diagnosis abnormality (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs an LED temperature diagnosis process (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). If the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S797. If the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S796.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “LED temperature abnormal” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). Specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects the temperature near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and near the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the temperature sensor B25, and when the condition in the LED temperature abnormal condition column of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. Set to the area. For example, as the LED (G) temperature abnormality relating to the LED light source 240G, when the temperature near the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105 ° C. or more and less than 110 ° C., a warning (01B (B means Bit) )) Is set, and if it is 110 ° C. or higher, the shutdown (11B) is set.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a fan rotation diagnosis process (S797). In this processing, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the fans 244A, 244B, 245.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the obtained FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S800. If the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S799.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, similarly to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the condition of the FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality in the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the operating voltage of the projector B2 is equal to or higher than a specified voltage (S801). If the operating voltage of the projector B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector B2 is lower than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S802.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, as in the case of the LED temperature abnormality described above, the voltage abnormality is set in accordance with the voltage abnormality condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S803). In this processing, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S806. If the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S805.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets “DLP abnormal” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, similarly to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the DLP abnormality is set according to the WDT-DLP condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating “LED temperature abnormality” (forced shutdown), “FAN rotation abnormality”, or “voltage abnormality” is set in the error management area (S806). . If data indicating any of the above-mentioned abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S307. If none of the data indicating the abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 issues a rotation stop command to the FANs 1 to 3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245) or a command to the DLP control circuit 232 and the LEDs (R, G, B) (LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). Then, a drive stop command is issued (S807). Thereby, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis processing. In the present embodiment, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped when data indicating "LED temperature abnormality", "FAN rotation abnormality", or "voltage abnormality" is set in the error management area. In order to recover, the power must be turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector device B2 may be restarted when the occurring abnormality is recovered while the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 114 shows a process at the time of transmission between the sub control and the projector by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring a cycle for transmitting a command from the projector control board B23.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 125 (4 msec × 125 = 500 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S812). If the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (elapsed at least 500 msec from the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S813. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the transmission process between the sub control and the projector.

  Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the projector setting flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM is "OFF" (S814). When the projector setting flag is “OFF” (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S815. If the projector setting flag is not “OFF” (S814: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S816.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “start parameter request” for the sub-control board SS (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing of S815, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S825.

  In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. If there is error data in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S817. If no error data exists in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S820.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56 and see FIG. 57)” to the sub-control board SS (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a second serial line transmission process of S825 described later.

  Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the error data in the error management area is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818). If the error data is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S819. If the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality nor the data indicating the DLP abnormality (S818: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  Next, the control LSI 230 sets the reset request flag in the various flags & work area of the DRAM to “ON” (S819). Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request for a command indicating “acknowledgment” (S6820: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S821. When there is no transmission request of the command indicating “reception confirmation” (S820: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S822.

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “acknowledgment” to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing in S821, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing in S825.

  In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command corresponding to the status (see the left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) to the sub-control board SS. If there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S823. If there is no command transmission request corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S824.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs status transmission data creation processing (S823). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S825.

  In S824, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of the next S825.

  Next, the control LSI 230 performs a second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub-control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector.

[Status transmission data creation processing]
FIG. 115 shows status transmission data creation processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area of the DRAM is the LED temperature (S831). If the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S834.

  Next, the control LSI 230 receives data from the temperature sensors B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and generates temperature data (S832).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the 'LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command and the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) as parameters (FIG. 56). S833). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the fan speed. If the parameter in the status storage area is the fan speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S835. If the parameter in the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S837.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the number of rotation pulses of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the number of FAN rotation pulses as a parameter in the 'FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S836). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness. If the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S840.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the luminance data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the LED luminance data acquired from the 'LED luminance number (CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command including the LED luminance setting in the status as a parameter (S839). . After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is a horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S841. If the parameter of the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S843.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the values of the horizontal position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the 'horizontal adjustment value (CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S842). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a vertical adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S844. If the parameter in the status storage area is not a vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S846.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the vertical position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the values of the vertical position A to E adjustment values as parameters for the "vertical adjustment value (CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)" command (S845). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S847. If the parameter in the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S849.

  Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position A to E adjustment values as parameters for the 'focus adjustment value (CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S848). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. If the parameter in the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S850. If the parameter in the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

  Next, the control LSI 230 receives data from the drift correction temperature sensor B25 relating to the drift correction temperature and generates temperature data (S850).

  Next, the control LSI 230 creates a “drift correction temperature (CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command including the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status as transmission data (S851). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation processing.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and the ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 includes a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, the flag area stores a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, and a sub liquid crystal setting flag. The various storage areas store a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, a reset request flag, an error management area, and a self-diagnosis storage area. The horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the luminance are stored in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area. These stored information will be described later.

  The ROM of the MCU 900 stores the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the luminance as data values of the liquid crystal initial setting area, and also sets the baud rate (third serial line), data length, parity, and the like as serial line setting values. Stop is stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores other various work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores control programs and constant data to be executed by the MCU 900.

(Processing of sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL)
[Sub LCD control main processing by MCU 900]
FIG. 117 shows a sub liquid crystal control main process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a touch panel input process (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on an operation signal (a signal corresponding to a touch operation, a flick operation, and a pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is “ON” (S863). If the reception completion flag is “ON” (S863: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S864. If the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S863: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S868.

  Next, the MCU 900 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “OFF” (S865).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates 'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)' (S866). If the transmission destination ID indicates 'sub liquid crystal' (S866: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S867. If the transmission destination ID does not indicate 'sub liquid crystal' (S866: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S868.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a process at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S867). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-liquid crystal self-diagnosis process (S868). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a process at the time of transmission between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S869). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reset request flags in the various storage areas of the DRAM are "ON" (S870). If the reset request flag is “ON” (S870: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S871. If the reset request flag is not “ON” (S870: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S872.

  Next, the MCU 900 waits for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) (S871). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value of) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 900. Outputs a reset signal to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, and the processing is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main processing (also referred to as “reboot”).

  In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

  Next, the MCU 900 waits for a period of, for example, 4 msec (S873). Thereafter, the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows a sub liquid crystal serial line reception interruption process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. This process is a communication interrupt process for receiving received data in response to an external request via the third serial line during the execution of the above-described sub liquid crystal control main process.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data received from the third serial line is 'STX (02H)' indicating the start of data (S881). If the received data is 'STX' (S881: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S882. If the received data is not “STX” (S881: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S883.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “OFF” and clears the reception storage area (S882). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In step S883, the MCU 900 stores the data received from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data is 'ETX (03H)' indicating the end of the data (S884). If the received data is "ETX" (S884: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S885. If the received data is not “ETX” (S884: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the process of S886.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON” (S885). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM is “ON”. If the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S886: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S887. If the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S886: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a received data sum check process (S887).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). If the sum value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S890. If the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S889. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt processing (S258 in FIG. 74).

  Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing.

  In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON”. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing.

[Sub liquid crystal initialization processing]
FIG. 119 shows a sub liquid crystal initialization process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes internal functions (S891).

  Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

  Next, the MCU 900 performs an initial screen setting of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the luminance stored in the ROM (S893).

  Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to 'OFF' in the flag area and various storage areas of the DRAM (S895). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization processing.

[Receive processing between sub control and sub liquid crystal]
FIG. 120 shows a process performed by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is 'status request (see CMD: 43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' (S901). If the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S901: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S902. If the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S901: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S904.

  Next, the MCU 900 registers a command transmission request indicating “status” in response to the “status request” (S902).

  Next, the MCU 900 saves various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

  In step S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S904: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S905. If the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S904: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S906.

  Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL with the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). Thereafter, the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S912.

  In step S <b> 906, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 41H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S907. If the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S908.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON” (S907). Thereafter, the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S912.

  In step S908, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is a “setting of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)” command. If the command of the acquired received data is a “sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting” command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S909. If the command of the acquired received data is not the “sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting” command (S908: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S910.

  Next, the MCU 900 stores the set value of the acquired sub-LCD screen resolution of the received data in the sub-LCD setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). Thereafter, the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S912.

  In step S910, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “sub liquid crystal luminance setting (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “sub liquid crystal luminance setting” (S910: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S911. If the command of the acquired reception data is not “sub-liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: No), the MCU 900 receives the command of the acquired reception data is “status request completed (CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. Shifts to the process of S912.

  Next, the MCU 900 stores the luminance setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such processing, when performing the optical adjustment of the projector device B2, the resolution and brightness thereof are arbitrarily changed so that an operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can easily recognize it. be able to.

  Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request of a command indicating “reception confirmation” (S912). Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 121 shows the sub-liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by a verify check (S921).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnosis value (S922: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S924. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S923.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “self-diagnosis abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operation state) of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (S924).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925). If the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S927. If the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S926.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads actual data (actual resolution, luminance, etc.) related to the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data relating to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928). If the setting value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data relating to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same setting value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S930. If the setting value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area does not match the actual data relating to the sub liquid crystal image setting (S928: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S929.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “sub liquid crystal screen setting error (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

  Next, the MCU 900 reads temperature information (sensor temperature) based on a signal of a temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931). If the sensor temperature is equal to or higher than 100 ° C. (S931: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S931. If the sensor temperature is lower than 100 ° C. (S931: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S933.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

  Next, the MCU 900 performs an operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ON state of the touch panel DD19T (the state of touch, flick, or pinch) is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). If the ON state of the touch panel DD19T has been detected for 30 minutes or longer (S934: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S935. If the state is not detected for more than 30 minutes (S934: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S936.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets “touch panel input error (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the status, the set value, or the data indicating the “temperature abnormality” is set in the error management area (S936). If any of the data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next step S937. If none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub-liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal operation stop process (S937). Thereby, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing.

[Sub-control - between sub LC transmission processing]
FIG. 122 shows a sub control-sub liquid crystal transmission process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the drawing, the MCU 900 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S941). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring a cycle for transmitting a command from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 50 (200 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S942). If the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S943. If the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission processing.

  Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). If error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S945. If no error data exists in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S947.

  Next, the MCU 900 sends an 'error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command to the sub control board SS in the error management area (CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55, D1: error information). ) To create transmission data (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a third serial line transmission process of S956 described later.

  Next, the MCU 900 sets the reset request flags in various storage areas of the DRAM to “ON” (S946). Thereafter, the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S956.

  In S947, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is "OFF". If the sub liquid crystal setting flag is “OFF” (S947: Yes), the MCU 900 proceeds to the next process of S948. If the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not “OFF” (S947: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S949.

  Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a 'start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub-control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S948, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

  In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for the 'acknowledgment' command to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request for the 'acknowledgment' command (S949: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next step S950. If there is no transmission request for the 'acknowledgment' command (S949: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S951.

  Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a 'reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub-control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S950, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

  In S951, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a transmission request of a “status” command to the sub-control board SS. If there is a transmission request for the 'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S952. If there is no transmission request of the 'status' command (S951: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S955.

  Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data type of the status storage area of the DRAM is related to touch input (S952). If the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S953. If the data type of the status storage area is not related to touch input, that is, related to liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S954.

  Next, the MCU 900 adds the data of the touch panel input area to the “status (CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command related to the touch input to the sub-control board SS to create transmission data (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S953, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

  In S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating “status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” related to the liquid crystal setting for the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by a third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S954, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

  In S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating “parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” to the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956.

  Next, the MCU 900 performs a third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL to the sub control substrate SS via the scaler substrate SK. Thereafter, the MCU 900 ends the transmission process between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2. A factory inspector (also referred to as a quality assurance officer) starts application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC 1000 and performs a predetermined operation in accordance with a menu of the software, thereby fixing the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1. Alternatively, the test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 can be displayed on each projection plane by operating the reel screen mechanism F1. FIG. 123 shows a state in which the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflection part D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D as an example. The factory inspection worker can observe such a display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the gaming machine 1.

  The test pattern TP is, for example, a color pattern in which SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bars are sprite in a circle and small circular patterns in four corners are arranged on a cross hatch pattern in the background. It is.

  Specifically, the factory inspector operates so that any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target, and every time the projection target is switched, While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector device B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. Thereby, for the projector device B2, the horizontal position adjustment value, the vertical position adjustment value, the focus position adjustment value, the LED luminance setting, the keystone distortion correction value, the white color temperature setting, the brightness setting, the contrast setting, the gamma setting, the test Optical adjustment can be performed for each item such as a pattern, a horizontal position offset, a vertical position offset, and a focus position offset.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of adjustment work before assembling the gaming machine, for example, identification symbols 'A' to 'C' are assigned to each of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, Using these identification symbols, horizontal position A to C adjustment values, vertical position A to C adjustment values, and focus positions A to C adjustment values that are different for each projection target are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, keystone distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) After being assembled, it is set in the SRAM 401 of the sub-control board SS. It should be noted that the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be changed by a maintenance worker at a site such as a game arcade by adjusting the offset at a factory or the like.

  On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP 'and the like displayed on the screen (the touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2 at the site such as a game arcade. After the gaming machine 1 is installed in a game arcade or the like, a test operation such as a test pattern TP ′ can be displayed on the touch panel DD19T serving as a screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 by performing a predetermined operation by a maintenance worker. . The maintenance worker can appropriately and individually perform optical adjustment of the projector device B2 using such a test pattern TP '.

  The test pattern TP 'displayed on the touch panel DD19T is different from the test pattern TP directly displayed on the projection target, and is displayed as an operation target that can be intuitively deformed as a virtual image by simulation. In addition, buttons T1 and T2 for changing the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction for each projection target are displayed on the touch panel DD19T, as well as trapezoidal distortion correction and LED brightness. , A button T3 for changing the setting of the white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value, an indicator T4, and a numeric keypad T5 for inputting various numerical values are also displayed.

  More specifically, the maintenance worker performs a predetermined operation to display the test pattern TP 'or the like on the touch panel DD19T, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 projects. Operate to be targeted. Thereafter, the maintenance operator selects one of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction by operating the buttons T1 and T2, and directly performs the test pattern TP ′ by operating the touch panel. Adjustment can be performed while changing the display mode so that the display mode becomes appropriate. That is, the display position of the test pattern TP 'changes vertically and horizontally and the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. Thus, with respect to the projector device B2, it is possible to change the setting of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction for each different projection target. At this time, the maintenance operator can also observe the actual test pattern TP since the test pattern TP is simultaneously projected from the projector device B2 onto the national screen mechanism D. The horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction are set in a projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and a projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

  The maintenance operator operates the button T3 and the numeric keypad T5 while observing the test pattern TP 'together with the actual test pattern TP, so that the trapezoidal distortion correction, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value are performed. Settings can also be changed for each of these items by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the test pattern TP 'changes its overall shape or its color tone according to the operation of the maintenance worker. The values of the items such as the trapezoidal distortion correction, the LED brightness, the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast, and the gamma value, which have been changed in this manner, are stored in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub-control board SS, Is set in the projector setting value storage area.

  Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

(Cooling structure of projector device)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector device X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. As described above, a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including the projection lens 210, an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (inside) are provided in the interior partitioned by the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22. 241) optical mechanism (not shown) is provided containing such further exhaust fan 245, the heat radiating plate 2430,2431, and the heat sink 243Xa are provided. A heat sink 243Xc is provided outside the cover case X22 so that the heat sink 243Xc is externally exposed. On one surface (the front surface in FIG. 125) of the cover case X22, an opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided. Note that the projector device X of the first modified example is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, and is provided so as to directly guide irradiation light to the projection target without passing through a mirror.

  An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) (not shown) and a DMD substrate (241a) are provided on one surface (the lower surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430 so as to be in contact therewith. Another radiator plate 2431 is arranged on the other side (the upper surface in FIG. 125) of the radiator plate 2430 so as to overlap, and the two radiator plates 2430 and 2431 are surfaced with screws. A heat conductive sheet (or heat conductive gel) is attached to the surface where the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat radiating plate 2431 are in contact with each other. Zu). A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat sink 2431. Further, by removing the screw of the heat sink 2431, the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc can be removed. The radiator plate 2430 is connected to transmit heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa via the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated into the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245 through an exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

  On the other hand, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through a hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to a heat sink 243Xc provided outside. That is, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to receive the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate from the heat radiating plate 2430 and further transmit the heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. As a result, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is transmitted to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the radiator plate 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat is exhausted. With such an external heat sink 243Xc, it is also possible to effectively eliminate the heat pool inside the projector device X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

  FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. A projector device X ′ shown in FIG. 13 has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, and a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including a projection lens 210 therein, similarly to the projector device X ′ according to the first modification described above. And an optical mechanism (not shown) including an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (241), and an exhaust fan 245, a heat radiating plate 2430, and heat sinks 243Xa and 243Xc are provided. I have. The heat sink 243Xc is different from the heat sink according to the first modification described above and is arranged as follows.

  The heat sink 243Xc is directly joined to one surface (the upper surface in FIG. 126) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and is provided so that heat is directly transmitted from the heat radiating plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided on one surface (the upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. According to such an arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, heat generated in the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transmitted to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2430, and the projector device X The heat will be exhausted outside. The heat sink 243Xc having the fin portion exposed to the outside can also effectively eliminate the heat pool inside the projector device X and prevent overheating of optical components such as a lens.

  FIG. 127 illustrates an arrangement form of a projector device according to the third modification. Although the detailed structure of the projector device X ″ shown in the drawing is not shown, the same structure as that of the projector device X ′ shown in FIG. 126 described above is employed except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector device X ″, a heat sink 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 instead of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat sink 2430 slightly protrudes from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X ", the heat radiating plate 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via a metal heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 is not shown. The upper surface wall G4 is made of a metal plate-like member having a high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel, for example. Heat is efficiently transmitted to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat radiating member. To prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachislot machine according to the above embodiment, and may be applied to, for example, a so-called pachinko machine.

  As above, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention and the modified examples of the projector device provided therein have been described. It is disclosed as an additional note that the above-described gaming machine 1 basically has the following features and effects.

[Appendix A-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection apparatus,
The projection device,
A plurality of optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD 241, lens unit B21, focus mechanism 242 of projection lens 210, etc.);
Optical control means for controlling the plurality of optical means (for example, a control LSI 230 of a projector control board B23 for performing a projector control process);
The optical control means can control the plurality of optical means based on various setting information,
Setting information changing means (for example, control LSI 230 or the like) for changing the various kinds of setting information according to an external input;
Setting information external requesting means (for example, a control LSI 230 for performing a sub-control-projector reception process and a sub-control-projector transmission process) for requesting the various setting information to the outside,
The control unit includes a setting information output unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 of a sub control board SS that performs a projector control process) that can output the various setting information to the optical control unit,
Wherein the setting information output means for outputting the various kinds of setting information according to the request of the various setting information from the setting information external request means (e.g., activation parameter request command or the like which control LSI230 outputs) And

  According to such a configuration, various setting information for controlling the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, the DMD 241, the focus mechanism 242, and the like in the projector device B2 is requested from the sub-control board SS, and the sub-control board is accordingly requested. The optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be performed after changing the setting information based on the various setting information output from the SS, so that a plurality of high-definition images having high image visual effects can be provided for each gaming machine. On the projection surfaces E11a and F1a and the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4.

[Appendix A-2]
The setting information external requesting unit is configured to execute a startup setting request signal for acquiring the various setting information at the time of turning on the power of the projection apparatus (for example, in S815 of the sub-control-projector transmission processing performed by the control LSI 230). A 'start parameter request' command or the like is output to the setting information output means.

  According to such a configuration, when the power of the projector apparatus B2 is turned on, the start-up parameter request command is output to the sub-control board SS, and various setting information is output from the sub-control board SS in response to the command. The optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be performed each time the projector device B is turned on.

[Appendix B-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection apparatus,
The projection device,
A plurality of optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD 241, lens unit B21, focus mechanism 242 of projection lens 210, etc.);
Optical control means for controlling the plurality of optical means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23).
The optical control means can control the plurality of optical means based on various setting information,
Setting information input means (for example, control LSI 230, second serial line, etc.) for externally inputting the various setting information;
Optical setting information storage means (for example, a DRAM of a projector control board B23) for storing the various setting information input by the setting information input means,
The control means includes:
Setting information output means (for example, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, a first serial line, a second serial line, etc.) for externally outputting the various setting information to the optical control means;
A control setting information storage unit (for example, a sub RAM board 41 of the sub control board SS) for storing the various setting information;
Setting information changing means for changing the various kinds of setting information based on the switching of the plurality of projection planes by the projection plane driving mechanism (for example, the sub CPU 400 Etc.) and
The various setting information changed by the setting information changing means is output to the outside through the setting information output means.

  According to such a configuration, when switching between the projection plane E11a and the projection plane F1a by operating the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2, for example, focus position adjustment values and various setting information for controlling the focus mechanism 242 are used. The sub-control board SS changes the focus position offset, and the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be appropriately and dynamically performed for each projection target based on various setting information output from the sub-control board SS after the change. Therefore, a high-quality image having a high image visual effect can be projected on any of the plurality of projection planes.

[Appendix C-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection apparatus,
The projection device,
An optical unit for projecting an image (for example, a focusing mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Optical control means for controlling the optical means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23);
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting a temperature in the projection device,
The optical control means obtains temperature information relating to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means, and outputs the temperature information to the control means. Control LSI 230, etc.)
The control unit corrects the setting information related to the projection device based on the temperature information output from the temperature information output unit and the predetermined temperature information, and corrects the corrected setting information (for example, focus drift). A temperature correction information output unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 that performs a projector drift correction process and a projector control reception process) that outputs a correction value or the like to the optical control unit.
The optical control means can control the optical means based on the setting information output by the temperature correction information output means.

  According to such a configuration, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS corrects the focus drift correction value as the setting information according to the temperature change in the projector device B2, and the projector control board B23 based on the focus drift correction value. Control LSI 230 can dynamically control the focus mechanism 242, so that a high-quality image with a high image visual effect can be projected on a plurality of projection planes.

[Appendix D-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device X, X ′, X ″, etc.) that projects an image by irradiation light;
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
The projection device,
A case (eg, a cover case X22);
A plurality of optical means (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD241, etc.) arranged inside the case and projecting an image;
A heat dissipating member (for example, a heat sink 243Xc) for dissipating heat generated by the plurality of optical means,
The heat dissipation member is exposed to the outside of the case.

  According to such a configuration, heat generated in the cover case X22 of the projector devices X and X 'can be efficiently discharged to the outside of the cover case X22 by the heat sink 243Xc. In addition to taking appropriate heat countermeasures, it can be operated stably, and can correspond to the specifications of various gaming machines, and can project high-quality images with high image visual effects on a plurality of projection planes.

[Appendix D-2]
The projection device includes another heat radiating unit (for example, heat radiating plates 2430, 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa) arranged at a position different from the heat radiating member.
The heat radiating means is housed inside the case.

  According to such a configuration, heat can be efficiently exhausted by the other radiator plates 2430, 2431 and the heat sink 243Xa arranged in the cover case X22, so that appropriate heat is applied to the projector devices X, X '. Measures can be taken.

[Appendix D-3]
The heat dissipation member is configured to be detachable from the projection device.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to remove the heat sink 243Xc from the projector devices X and X 'according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Can be.

[Appendix D-4]
A gaming machine body (for example, housing 2 etc.);
A front door (for example, an upper door mechanism UD, a lower door mechanism DD, etc.) disposed on the gaming machine body;
A projection device that projects an image by irradiation light (for example, a projection device X ″),
A display device (for example, a display unit A or the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device,
The projection device,
A case (eg, a cover case X22);
A plurality of optical means (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD241, etc.) arranged inside the case and projecting an image;
A heat radiating member (radiator plate 2430) for dissipating heat generated by the plurality of optical means,
The heat dissipation member is connected to an upper portion (upper wall G4) of the gaming machine main body.

  According to such a configuration, heat generated in the case of the projector device X "can be efficiently exhausted to the upper surface wall G4 of the game machine main body by the radiator plate 2430. In addition to taking appropriate measures against heat, it can be operated stably, it can correspond to various specifications of gaming machines, and high-quality images with high visual effects can be projected on a plurality of projection planes.

[Appendix E-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection apparatus,
The projection device,
A focus mechanism (for example, for changing the focal length) based on a plurality of focal position information (for example, focus positions A to E stored in the EEPROM 231) corresponding to the plurality of projection planes. Focusing mechanism 242).
The control means controls the projection plane driving mechanism to relatively displace at least one of the plurality of projection planes (for example, based on a screen accessory control task performed by the sub CPU 400). Performing a command to change the focal length to the projection device;
The projection apparatus focuses while changing the focal length of the focus mechanism based on a command from the control unit.

  According to such a configuration, when the projection surfaces E11a and F1a are relatively displaced with respect to the projector device B2, the focal length is dynamically changed based on the focus positions A to E adjustment values stored in the EEPROM 231. The image can be projected with the focus properly projected on the projection planes E11a and F1a while being changed or statically changed, so that there is no defocus even on the projection plane during or after the displacement, and the image visual effect is obtained. High-definition images can be projected.

[Appendix E-2]
The focus mechanism,
A projection lens (for example, projection lens 210 or the like) held movably along the optical axis direction;
A movable member (for example, a rack member 242A or the like) movable integrally with the projection lens;
A lead screw (e.g., lead screw 242B or the like) arranged along the optical axis direction and rotatable while being screwed with the movable member;
A drive motor (for example, a focus motor 242C) for rotating the lead screw.

  According to such a configuration, the projection lens 210 can be moved in the optical axis direction with high accuracy and high speed by the lead screw 242B. Therefore, when the projection surfaces E11a and F1a are displaced relative to the projector device B2. In addition, the focus position can be adjusted so that the focal length of the projection lens 210 is appropriate for both the projection planes E11a and F1a, and the projection planes E11a and F1a are accurately focused. You can project video.

[Appendix E-3]
The projection device, the plurality of projection planes, and the projection plane drive mechanism are integrated as a display unit (for example, a display unit A) detachable from a suitable part of the game machine. .

  According to such a configuration, adjustment work can be performed on the focus mechanism 242 of the focus device B2 for each display unit A before being mounted on the gaming machine 1.

[Appendix F-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism,
The projection device,
A plurality of optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD 241, lens unit B21, focus mechanism 242 of projection lens 210, etc.);
Optical control means (for example, a projector control board B23 or the like) for controlling the plurality of optical means,
The optical control means can control the plurality of optical means based on various setting information,
A nonvolatile setting information storage unit (for example, an EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23) that stores the various setting information so as to be changeable according to an external input;
A setting information changing unit (for example, an adjustment PC 1000 or the like) for changing the various setting information stored in the setting information storage unit by an external input;
The control unit is a control signal output unit that outputs a control signal for controlling the plurality of optical units to the optical control unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 of a sub-control board SS that performs a port ejector control process). Has,
The optical control unit controls the optical unit based on the various setting information stored in the setting information storage unit and a control signal output from the control signal output unit.

  According to such a configuration, various setting information stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 in order to control various optical means in the projector device B2 can be changed according to an external input from the adjustment PC 1000. Accordingly, since the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be performed, a high-quality image having a high image visual effect can be projected on a plurality of projection planes for each gaming machine.

[Supplementary Note G-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection apparatus;
An auxiliary display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the like) arranged at a different position from the projection device;
The projection device,
A plurality of optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, DMD 241, lens unit B21, focus mechanism 242 of projection lens 210, etc.);
Optical control means for controlling the plurality of optical means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23).
The optical control unit can control the plurality of optical units based on various setting information that can be changed according to an external input,
The control means causes the auxiliary display device to display an adjustment screen (for example, an adjustment screen displayed on the sub liquid product display device DD19) for adjusting the various setting information, and uses the adjustment screen. And setting information changing means (for example, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS) for changing the setting information.

  According to such a configuration, while operating the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2, the projection planes E11a and F1a are displaced, and various setting information for controlling the optical unit is changed according to an external input from the touch panel DD19T. When changing, the operator can dynamically perform the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 while checking the test pattern TP ′ as the image for image adjustment displayed on the adjustment screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. The optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be performed at the time of manufacturing or maintenance of the gaming machine, and a high-quality image with a high image visual effect can be displayed for a long time.

[Supplementary Note H-1]
A plurality of display devices (for example, a projector device B2, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19, etc.),
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) capable of outputting a display signal to the plurality of display devices;
Display signal conversion means (for example, a scaler board SK or the like) provided between the plurality of display devices and the control means,
The control means includes:
A display signal synthesizing unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 that generates a divided display pattern) that synthesizes display signals corresponding to each of the plurality of display devices;
A combined signal output unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 that generates a divided display pattern) that outputs one combined signal combined by the display signal combining unit;
The display signal conversion means,
Combined signal input means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler board SK) for inputting one combined signal output from the combined signal output means;
Composite signal dividing means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler substrate SK) for dividing one composite signal input by the composite signal input means into a plurality of display signals;
Display signal output means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler board SK) for outputting a plurality of display signals divided by the synthesized signal division means to the corresponding plurality of display devices, respectively;
The combined signal dividing means may be converted to display signals each to be output to the plurality of display devices.

  According to such a configuration, although there are a plurality of display devices such as the projector device B2 and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, a plurality of display signals corresponding thereto are output collectively as one combined signal, and thereafter, the one combined signal is output. Is divided into a plurality of original display signals and supplied to the corresponding projector device B2 and sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, so that a display control system can be easily constructed, and hardware and software aspects can be realized. Cost increase can be suppressed.

[Supplementary Note I-1]
A plurality of display devices (for example, a projector device B2, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19, etc.),
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) capable of outputting a display signal to the plurality of display devices;
Display signal conversion means (for example, a scaler board SK or the like) provided between the plurality of display devices and the control means,
The control means includes:
A display signal synthesizing unit (for example, a sub CPU 400 that generates a divided display pattern) that synthesizes display signals corresponding to each of the plurality of display devices;
Combined signal output means for outputting one combined signal combined by the display signal combining means (for example, the sub CPU 400 for generating a divided display pattern);
Display information setting instructing means (for example, a sub CPU 400 for performing a scalar control process) for instructing setting of the number of displays and display characteristics according to each of the plurality of display devices as display information;
The display signal conversion means,
A display information setting unit (for example, an MCU 700 for performing a scalar substrate main process) for setting a display number and a display characteristic instructed by the display information setting instructing unit;
Combined signal input means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler board SK) for inputting one combined signal output from the combined signal output means;
Composite signal dividing means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler substrate SK) for dividing one composite signal input by the composite signal input means into a plurality of display signals;
Display signal output means (for example, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 of a scaler board SK) for outputting a plurality of display signals divided by the synthesized signal division means to the corresponding plurality of display devices, respectively. I do.

  According to such a configuration, although there are a plurality of display devices such as the projector device B2 and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, a plurality of display signals corresponding to these are collectively output as one combined signal from the sub control board SS. The one combined signal is divided into a plurality of original display signals based on the display number and display characteristics set and instructed by the sub-control board SS, and these display signals correspond to the corresponding projector device B2 and sub-liquid crystal display device, respectively. Since the display control system is supplied to the DD 19, a display control system can be easily constructed, and cost increases in hardware and software can be suppressed.

[Appendix I-2]
The display signal converting means sets the number of synthesized one synthesized signal input by the synthesized signal input means and the display characteristics of the plurality of display signals divided by the synthesized signal dividing means by the display information setting instruction means. It is characterized by being instructed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to set and instruct the display characteristic for each of the number of composite signals of one composite signal and the plurality of display signals divided according to the number of composite signals. It is possible to efficiently convert a synthesized signal into a plurality of display signals that differ depending on display characteristics.

[Supplementary Note J-1]
A main control unit (for example, a main control board MS or the like) for performing main control processing relating to the game and outputting various control signals;
Game operation control means (for example, a reel drive board RD or the like) for controlling a predetermined game operation in accordance with a control signal from the main control means;
Relay means (for example, a door relay board DS or the like) for relaying various signals to the main control means,
The main control means and the game operation control means are connected so as to output a control signal in one direction from the main control means to the game operation control means,
The game operation control means and the relay means are connected via a first optical fiber cable (for example, a first optical fiber cable FC1) so as to transmit a signal in one direction from the game operation control means to the relay means. Has been
The relay unit and the main control unit are connected via a second optical fiber cable (for example, a second optical fiber cable FC2) so as to transmit a signal in one direction from the relay unit to the main control unit. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are connected in a loop so that signals are transmitted in only one direction via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the second optical fiber cable FC2. It is possible to easily reduce the number of connection lines compared to the case where all harnesses are used, to prevent malfunction of internal devices due to noise of connection lines, and to reduce the internal structure including wiring. Design flexibility can be increased.

[Appendix K-1]
A projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) for projecting an image by irradiation light,
A plurality of projection planes (for example, reflection planes of the reflection units D1 to D4, a projection plane E11a, a projection plane F1a, and the like) capable of displaying an image projected by the projection device;
A projection surface drive mechanism (for example, a front screen drive mechanism E2, a reel) that relatively displaces at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.) with respect to the projection device. Screen driving mechanism F2).
Control means (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for controlling the operation of the projection plane driving mechanism and controlling the projection device,
The projection device,
An optical unit for projecting an image (for example, a projection lens 210 or the like);
Optical control means (for example, a focus mechanism 242, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, etc.) having a focus mechanism for controlling the optical means,
The optical control means has a focus mechanism control means (for example, a lead screw 242B of the focus mechanism 242, a control LSI 230, etc.) for controlling the focus mechanism,
The control means calculates a focus change time based on a required operation time of the projection plane driving mechanism and a time required to change a focus position of the focus mechanism (for example, performing a focus change request process). Sub CPU 400 etc.)
The control unit instructs the optical control unit (for example, the sub CPU 400 that performs a screen accessory control process) to control the focus mechanism based on the focus change time calculated by the focus change time calculation unit. It is characterized by doing.

  According to such a configuration, when the projection planes E11a and F1a are displaced by operating the screen driving mechanisms E2 and F2, the time required for the operation and the time required for changing the focus position of the focus mechanism 242 are reduced. By controlling the focus mechanism 242 based on the calculated focus change time, the focus adjustment of the projection lens 210 can be performed efficiently, so that a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be obtained even on the projection plane after the displacement. Can quickly display a natural image.

[Appendix K-2]
The control means is capable of canceling the focus change time calculated by the focus change time calculation means (for example, the processing of S191 of the focus change request processing).

  According to such a configuration, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS can control the focus mechanism 242 after canceling the focus change time, so that the focus adjustment can be performed quickly and efficiently.

1 gaming machine G cabinet G4 top wall A display unit B1 projector cover B12 top wall B2, X, X ', X "projector device B21 lens unit B22, X22 case B23 projector control board B25 temperature sensor 210 projection lens 230 control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Lead screw 242C Focus motors 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output Scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Heat sinks D1 to D4 Reflector E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a Projection plane (movable projection plane)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub-control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display device DD19T Touch panel

Claims (3)

A plurality of display devices;
A display control unit capable of outputting a display signal to the plurality of display devices,
The display control unit,
A display signal synthesizing unit that synthesizes image data corresponding to the plurality of display devices to generate a display signal;
Display signal dividing means for generating a divided display signal by dividing the display signal into a plurality;
Display signal output means capable of outputting the divided display signal to the plurality of display devices,
The display signal dividing unit is capable of dividing the display signal into a plurality of divided display signals and converting the display signal into a resolution corresponding to the divided display signal, and converting the display signal into a resolution corresponding to the plurality of display devices. A gaming machine characterized in that it can output the information. The display signal dividing means can generate a divided display signal having two resolutions,
Among the two types of resolutions, the first resolution and the second resolution are resolutions in which the vertical and horizontal axes of the first resolution are different from the vertical and horizontal axes of the second resolution, and 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first resolution is higher than the second resolution.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display signal output unit is capable of changing an enlargement ratio by setting when converting the divided display signal.

Images